TWI552059B - Touch panel system and electronic device - Google Patents
Touch panel system and electronic device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TWI552059B TWI552059B TW101119848A TW101119848A TWI552059B TW I552059 B TWI552059 B TW I552059B TW 101119848 A TW101119848 A TW 101119848A TW 101119848 A TW101119848 A TW 101119848A TW I552059 B TWI552059 B TW I552059B
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- touch panel
- touch
- signal
- unit
- panel system
- Prior art date
Links
Landscapes
- Position Input By Displaying (AREA)
Description
本發明係關於觸控面板系統及具備該系統之電子機器,尤其關於可有效消除藉由顯示裝置等產生之雜訊(取消)的觸控面板系統及電子機器。 The present invention relates to a touch panel system and an electronic device including the same, and more particularly to a touch panel system and an electronic device that can effectively eliminate noise (cancellation) generated by a display device or the like.
近來,在各種電子機器例如智慧型手機等攜帶資訊機器、及自動售票機等自動販賣機上搭載觸控面板系統的技術正迅速發展。 Recently, technology for mounting a touch panel system on vending machines such as information devices and automatic ticket vending machines for various electronic devices such as smart phones is rapidly developing.
此種觸控面板系統之構造係通常將觸控面板層積於顯示裝置之上部(正面)。因此,設置於觸控面板上之感應器不僅受到顯示裝置所產生之時脈等雜訊之影響,亦容易受其他外來雜訊之影響。該種雜訊係導致觸控操作之檢測感度下降。 The structure of such a touch panel system generally stacks the touch panel on the upper portion (front side) of the display device. Therefore, the sensor disposed on the touch panel is not only affected by noises such as clocks generated by the display device, but also susceptible to other external noise. This kind of noise system causes the detection sensitivity of the touch operation to decrease.
專利文獻1中記載解決此種雜訊之對策之觸控面板系統(座標輸入裝置)。專利文獻1之觸控面板系統係為消除雜訊而具備雜訊處理部。圖19係顯示設置於專利文獻1之觸控面板系統之雜訊處理部100之方塊圖。如圖19所示,雜訊處理部100係具備:過濾部101、邏輯反轉部102、及加算部103。過濾部101係接收自設置於未圖示之觸控面板上之感應器之輸出訊號(類比訊號)。再者,過濾部101係將該輸入訊號所包含之AC訊號成分作為雜訊訊號而擷取。邏輯反轉部102係將擷取之雜訊訊號之相位反轉180度。加算部103係將相位反轉180度之雜訊訊號加算至包含輸入至過濾 部101之雜訊訊號的輸入訊號中。 Patent Document 1 describes a touch panel system (coordinate input device) that solves such noise countermeasures. The touch panel system of Patent Document 1 is provided with a noise processing unit for eliminating noise. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the noise processing unit 100 provided in the touch panel system of Patent Document 1. As shown in FIG. 19, the noise processing unit 100 includes a filter unit 101, a logic inversion unit 102, and an addition unit 103. The filter unit 101 receives an output signal (analog signal) from a sensor provided on a touch panel (not shown). Furthermore, the filtering unit 101 extracts the AC signal component included in the input signal as a noise signal. The logic inversion unit 102 inverts the phase of the extracted noise signal by 180 degrees. The adding unit 103 adds the noise signal whose phase is inverted by 180 degrees to include the input to the filtering. The input signal of the noise signal of the part 101.
藉此,在專利文獻1之觸控面板系統中,於過濾部101擷取之雜訊訊號被反轉,且該反轉訊號被加算至來自感應器的輸入訊號(類比訊號)中。即,在來自感應器之輸入訊號所包含之雜訊成分中,加算上與雜訊成分相同位準之反轉訊號。藉此,抵消自感應器之輸入訊號中重疊之雜訊。從而,可降低自感應器之輸入訊號所包含之雜訊的影響。 Therefore, in the touch panel system of Patent Document 1, the noise signal extracted by the filter unit 101 is inverted, and the inverted signal is added to the input signal (analog signal) from the sensor. That is, the inversion signal of the same level as the noise component is added to the noise component included in the input signal from the sensor. Thereby, the noise overlapping in the input signal from the sensor is cancelled. Thereby, the influence of the noise included in the input signal from the sensor can be reduced.
[專利文獻1]日本特開2001-125744號公報(2001年5月11日公開) [Patent Document 1] Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2001-125744 (published on May 11, 2001)
然而,專利文獻1之觸控面板系統存在有無法消除AC訊號成分以外之雜訊之問題。 However, the touch panel system of Patent Document 1 has a problem that noise other than the AC signal component cannot be eliminated.
具體而言,如上所述,專利文獻1之觸控面板系統係對於來自成應器之輸入訊號,將該輸入訊號所包含之AC訊號成分作為雜訊來處理。該AC訊號係由過濾部101擷取後,以邏輯反轉部102將相位反轉180度。接著,在加算部103中,將反轉之訊號加算到包含AC訊號成分之輸入訊號中。藉此,在專利文獻1中,過濾部101擷取AC訊號成分之處理在雜訊處理中最為重要。 Specifically, as described above, the touch panel system of Patent Document 1 processes the input signal from the maker to the AC signal component included in the input signal as noise. After the AC signal is extracted by the filter unit 101, the phase is inverted by 180 degrees by the logic inverting unit 102. Next, in the adding unit 103, the inverted signal is added to the input signal including the AC signal component. Therefore, in Patent Document 1, the processing of extracting the AC signal component by the filter unit 101 is most important in the noise processing.
但,專利文獻1未詳細揭示過濾部101之構成。因此,專利文獻1之觸控面板系統可將雜訊消除至何種程度係尚不 明確。此外,專利文獻1係將包含於類比訊號之AC訊號成分作為雜訊來處理。即,專利文獻1之觸控面板系統係設想僅基本消除脈衝雜訊,對於脈衝雜訊以外之雜訊係不作為消除對象。因此,無法確實去除脈衝雜訊以外之多種雜訊。 However, Patent Document 1 does not disclose the configuration of the filter unit 101 in detail. Therefore, the degree to which the touch panel system of Patent Document 1 can eliminate noise is not yet clear. Further, Patent Document 1 treats an AC signal component included in an analog signal as noise. That is, the touch panel system of Patent Document 1 is supposed to substantially eliminate only the pulse noise, and the noise system other than the pulse noise is not eliminated. Therefore, it is impossible to surely remove a variety of noises other than pulse noise.
再者,亦期望降低觸控面板系統之電力消耗或提升觸控操作之檢測感度。 Furthermore, it is also desirable to reduce the power consumption of the touch panel system or to improve the detection sensitivity of the touch operation.
本發明係鑒於上述先前之問題點而完成者,其目的在於提供一種可確實消除多種類雜訊,且降低電力消耗,並提升觸控操作之檢測感度的觸控面板系統及電子機器。 The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a touch panel system and an electronic device that can reliably eliminate various types of noise, reduce power consumption, and improve the detection sensitivity of a touch operation.
本發明之觸控面板系統為解決上述課題,其特徵在於包含:觸控面板,其具備:複數根感應線、及對上述感應線交叉而設置且與上述感應線之間形成靜電電容之複數根驅動線;驅動線驅動電路,其並列驅動上述驅動線;觸控面板控制器,其處理上述感應線訊號,並產生觸控資訊;及區域設定部,其基於上述觸控資訊,在上述觸控面板中設定有效區域;且上述觸控面板控制器係具備:減算部,其算出互相鄰接之上述感應線之訊號差分;解碼部,其藉由運算並列驅動上述驅動線之碼序列、及與由上述減算部算出之上述碼序列對應之差分輸出序列的內積,算出上述靜電電容之差分分布;及,觸控檢測部,其基於上述解碼部所算出之上述靜電電容差分分布,產生上述觸控資訊;上述區域設定部係將基於上述觸控資訊而設定於上述觸控面 板之上述有效區域進行更新,而設定新的上述有效區域;且該觸控面板系統進行由上述驅動線驅動電路選擇性驅動通過目前設定之上述有效區域之上述驅動線之第1動作、與由上述觸控面板控制器選擇性處理通過目前設定之上述有效區域之上述感應線之訊號之第2動作中之至少一動作。 In order to solve the above problems, the touch panel system of the present invention includes a touch panel including: a plurality of sensing lines; and a plurality of roots formed by intersecting the sensing lines and forming an electrostatic capacitance with the sensing lines a driving line driving circuit that drives the driving line in parallel; a touch panel controller that processes the sensing line signal and generates touch information; and an area setting unit that performs the touch based on the touch information An effective area is set in the panel; and the touch panel controller includes: a subtraction unit that calculates a signal difference of the sensing lines adjacent to each other; and a decoding unit that sequentially drives the code sequence of the driving line by parallel operation and The difference product of the difference output sequence corresponding to the code sequence calculated by the subtraction unit calculates a difference distribution of the capacitance; and the touch detection unit generates the touch based on the capacitance difference distribution calculated by the decoding unit Information; the above-mentioned area setting department will be set on the above touch surface based on the above touch information. The effective area of the board is updated to set a new effective area; and the touch panel system performs the first operation and the driving of the driving line by the driving line driving circuit to selectively drive the effective area The touch panel controller selectively processes at least one of a second operation of the signal passing through the sensing line of the active area currently set.
根據上述構成,減算部在鄰接之感應線間取得差分訊號值。即,取得雜訊相關性更高之鄰接感應線間之差分。藉此,自感應線之輸出訊號消除雜訊部分,且擷取觸控操作原本之訊號。從而,可確實除除(消除)於觸控面板反映之各種類雜訊。又,根據上述構成,並列驅動觸控面板,且令解碼部對減算部算出之靜電電容差分值進行解碼。藉此,由於求得之靜電電容碼經碼長倍化(N倍),故無須依存於驅動線數,即可提高靜電電容訊號強度。此外,若為與先前方式相同之訊號強度,即可削減驅動線之驅動次數,並可降低電力消耗。 According to the above configuration, the subtraction unit acquires the differential signal value between the adjacent sensing lines. That is, the difference between adjacent sensing lines with higher noise correlation is obtained. Thereby, the output signal of the self-sensing line eliminates the noise part, and the original signal of the touch operation is taken. Therefore, various kinds of noises reflected by the touch panel can be surely removed (removed). Further, according to the above configuration, the touch panel is driven in parallel, and the decoding unit decodes the capacitance difference value calculated by the subtraction unit. Thereby, since the obtained electrostatic capacitance code is multiplied by the code length (N times), the electrostatic capacitance signal strength can be improved without depending on the number of driving lines. In addition, if the signal intensity is the same as in the previous method, the number of driving of the driving line can be reduced, and power consumption can be reduced.
再者,根據上述構成,藉由第1動作可防止無用地驅動驅動線。因此,可降低驅動線驅動時所耗費之電力,且可抑制雜訊產生,並提升觸控操作之檢測感度。此外,藉由限定地驅動驅動線,可提升觸控位置之檢測精度。又,藉由第2動作,可防止無用之訊號處理。因此,可降低訊號處理所耗費之消耗電力。此外,藉由對通過有效區域之感應線訊號進行限定性處理,可提升觸控位置之檢測精度。 Furthermore, according to the above configuration, the drive line can be prevented from being driven uselessly by the first operation. Therefore, the power consumed by the driving line driving can be reduced, noise generation can be suppressed, and the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be improved. In addition, the detection accuracy of the touch position can be improved by driving the drive line in a limited manner. Moreover, by the second operation, useless signal processing can be prevented. Therefore, the power consumption of the signal processing can be reduced. In addition, the detection accuracy of the touch position can be improved by performing a limited processing on the sensing line signal passing through the effective area.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,進而包含開關,其針對自上 述感應線選擇之感應線Sn、與鄰接該感應線Sn之2根感應線(感應線Sn+1、感應線Sn-1),以算出上述感應線Sn之訊號與上述感應線Sn+1之訊號之差分的第1差分((Sn+1)-Sn)、或上述感應線Sn之訊號與上述感應線Sn-1之訊號之差分的第2差分(Sn-(Sn-1))之方式,切換輸入至上述減算部之上述感應線之訊號。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, a switch is further included, which is directed to The sensing line Sn selected by the sensing line and the two sensing lines (the sensing line Sn+1 and the sensing line Sn-1) adjacent to the sensing line Sn are used to calculate the signal of the sensing line Sn and the sensing line Sn+1. The first difference ((Sn+1)-Sn) of the difference of the signal, or the second difference (Sn-(Sn-1)) of the difference between the signal of the sensing line Sn and the signal of the sensing line Sn-1 And switching the signal input to the sensing line of the above-mentioned subtraction unit.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述開關包含2個端子,且構成為選擇其中一端子;並列驅動上述驅動線之上述碼序列係並列驅動如下所示之第1號至第M號上述驅動線(成分為1或-1)者:d1=(d11,d12,...,d1N) In the touch panel system of the present invention, the switch may include two terminals and be configured to select one of the terminals; and the code sequence for driving the driving lines in parallel may drive the first to the Mth as shown in the following manner. No. of the above drive line (component 1 or -1): d 1 = (d 11 , d 12 , ..., d 1N )
d2=(d21,d22,...,d2N) d 2 = (d 21 , d 22 ,...,d 2N )
. .
. .
. .
dM=(dM1,dM2,...,dMN),將對應於上述碼序列之上述差分輸出序列「Sj,P(j=1,...,[L/2],P=1,2)(L為感應線數、[n]=n之整數部分)」定義為:Sj,1:開關SW選擇一方端子時,對於d1~dM之輸出序列;Sj,2:開關SW選擇另一方端子時,對於d1~dM之輸出序列;上述解碼部運算並列驅動上述驅動線之上述碼序列、及與上述碼序列對應之上述差分輸出序列之內積。 d M = (d M1 , d M2 , ..., d MN ), which will correspond to the above differential output sequence "S j,P (j=1,...,[L/2],P) =1, 2) (L is the number of sensing lines, the integer part of [n] = n)" is defined as: S j, 1 : when the switch SW selects one terminal, the output sequence for d 1 ~ d M ; S j, 2 : When the switch SW selects the other terminal, the output sequence of d 1 to d M ; the decoding unit calculates the inner product of the code sequence of the drive line and the differential output sequence corresponding to the code sequence.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述減算部包含將類比訊號轉換為數位訊號之第1 AD轉換部,上述減算部在利用上述第1 AD轉換部將自上述感應線取得之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號後,藉由算出該數位訊號之差分,而算出上述第1差分與上述第2差分。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the subtraction unit may include a first AD conversion unit that converts the analog signal into a digital signal, and the subtraction unit compares the first AD conversion unit with the analog line. After the signal is converted into a digital signal, the first difference and the second difference are calculated by calculating the difference between the digital signals.
根據上述構成,在將觸控面板輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號後,藉由進行減算處理,可消除雜訊。 According to the above configuration, after the analog signal output from the touch panel is converted into a digital signal, noise reduction can be eliminated by performing subtraction processing.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述減算部包含將類比訊號轉換成數位訊號之第2 AD轉換部,上述減算部在算出自上述感應線取得之類比訊號之差分後,藉由利用上述第2 AD轉換部將該類比訊號之差分轉換成數位訊號,而算出上述第1差分與上述第2差分。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the subtraction unit may include a second AD conversion unit that converts the analog signal into a digital signal, and the subtraction unit calculates the difference between the analog signals obtained from the sensing line by using the subtraction unit. The difference between the analog signals is converted into a digital signal by the second AD conversion unit, and the first difference and the second difference are calculated.
根據上述構成,對自觸控面板輸出之類比訊號直接進行類比訊號減算處理後,轉換為數位訊號,可除去雜訊。 According to the above configuration, the analog signal outputted from the touch panel is directly subjected to the analog signal reduction processing, and then converted into a digital signal to remove the noise.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述減算部較好包含:全差動放大器,其係藉由算出自彼此鄰接之上述感應線所取得之類比訊號的差分,而算出上述第1差分與上述第2差分。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the subtracting unit preferably includes a fully differential amplifier that calculates the first difference and the first by calculating a difference between the analog signals obtained from the sensing lines adjacent to each other 2 differential.
根據上述構成,利用全差動放大器對由觸控面板輸出之類比訊號直接進行類比訊號減算處理後,將其轉換為數位訊號,可除去雜訊。 According to the above configuration, the analog signal outputted by the analog signal outputted by the touch panel is directly subjected to the analog signal subtraction processing by the fully differential amplifier, and then converted into a digital signal to remove the noise.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可進而包含:非觸控操作時資訊記憶部,其係在非觸控操作時,記憶由上述解碼部算出之上述靜電電容之差分分布;及校正部,其係從觸控操作時由上述解碼部算出之上述靜電電容之差分分布,減 去上述非觸控操作時記憶於資訊記憶部內之非觸控操作時上述靜電電容之差分分布。 The touch panel system of the present invention may further include: a non-touch operation information storage unit that memorizes a difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance calculated by the decoding unit during a non-touch operation; and a correction unit, The difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance calculated by the decoding unit during the touch operation is reduced. The difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitances stored in the non-touch operation in the information memory unit when the non-touch operation is performed.
根據上述構成,非觸控操作時資訊記憶部係記憶由解碼部解碼之非觸控操作時靜電電容之差分分布。且,校正部係從觸控操作時之靜電電容之差分分布,減去非觸控操作時記憶於資訊記憶部內之非觸控操作時靜電電容之差分分布。即,校正部係算出(觸控操作時靜電電容之差分分布)-(非觸控操作時靜電電容之差分分布)。因此,可消除觸控面板之內在偏移。 According to the above configuration, the information storage unit stores the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the non-touch operation decoded by the decoding unit during the non-touch operation. Moreover, the correction unit subtracts the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the non-touch operation in the information memory unit during the non-touch operation from the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the touch operation. That is, the correction unit calculates (the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the touch operation) - (the differential distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the non-touch operation). Therefore, the internal offset of the touch panel can be eliminated.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述觸控檢測部基於由上述減算部算出之彼此鄰接之感應線訊號之差分、與正及負臨限值之比較結果,判定有無觸控操作。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the touch detection unit may determine whether there is a touch operation based on a difference between the sense line signals adjacent to each other calculated by the subtraction unit and a comparison result between the positive and negative threshold values. .
根據上述構成,觸控檢測部係基於消除雜訊後彼此鄰接之感應線之訊號差分,來判定觸控操作之有無。因此,可正確判斷觸控操作之有無。 According to the above configuration, the touch detection unit determines the presence or absence of the touch operation based on the signal difference between the sensing lines adjacent to each other after the noise is removed. Therefore, the presence or absence of the touch operation can be correctly judged.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述觸控檢測部基於由上述減算部算出之彼此鄰接之感應線訊號之差分、與正及負臨限值之比較結果,作成將上述靜電電容之差分分布3值化之增減表,且將該增減表轉換為2值圖像,藉此產生上述觸控資訊。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the touch detection unit may create the electrostatic capacitance based on a difference between the sense line signals adjacent to each other calculated by the subtraction unit and a comparison between the positive and negative threshold values. The difference distribution is a three-valued increase/decrease table, and the increase/decrease table is converted into a binary image, thereby generating the touch information.
根據上述構成,在除去雜訊訊號後,將彼此鄰接之感應線訊號之差分輸入觸控檢測部。觸控檢測部係使用彼此鄰接之感應線訊號之差分、與儲存於觸控檢測部之正及負臨限值之比較結果,作成將各感應線訊號之差分分布3值化 之增減表。進而,觸控檢測部藉由將該增減表2值化,將增減表轉換為2值圖像。藉此,於經轉換之2值圖像中擷取觸控候選位置。從而,基於該2值圖像,藉由識別觸控資訊(觸控大小、觸控位置等),除了可判定觸控操作之有無以外,亦可更正確識別觸控資訊。 According to the above configuration, after the noise signal is removed, the difference between the adjacent sensing line signals is input to the touch detecting unit. The touch detection unit uses the difference between the sense line signals adjacent to each other and the comparison between the positive and negative threshold values stored in the touch detection unit to create a three-valued difference distribution of the sense line signals. Increase or decrease table. Further, the touch detection unit converts the increase/decrease table into a binary image by binarizing the increase/decrease table. Thereby, the touch candidate position is captured in the converted binary image. Therefore, based on the binary image, by recognizing the touch information (touch size, touch position, etc.), in addition to determining whether the touch operation is present, the touch information can be more correctly recognized.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好進而包含:加算部,其對由上述減算部算出之差分進行相加;且上述觸控面板至少包含一根副感應線,上述減算部進而算出上述副感應線與鄰接於該副感應線之感應線之差分的第3差分,上述加算部將上述第1差分、上述第2差分、及上述第3差分相加。 Preferably, the touch panel system of the present invention further includes: an adding unit that adds the difference calculated by the subtracting unit; and the touch panel includes at least one auxiliary sensing line, and the subtracting unit further calculates the pair The third difference between the sensing line and the sensing line adjacent to the sub sensing line, the adding unit adds the first difference, the second difference, and the third difference.
根據上述構成,於觸控面板之同一面內(同一面上)設置有感應線與副感應線。藉此,感應線及副感應線之任一輸出訊號中,皆包含有於觸控面板反映之各種雜訊訊號。再者,減算部係取得包含觸控操作之訊號與雜訊訊號之感應線之輸出訊號、與包含雜訊訊號之副感應線之輸出訊號之差分。藉此,從感應線之輸出訊號除去雜訊成分,並擷取觸控操作原本之訊號。從而,可確實除去(消除)於觸控面板反映之多種雜訊。再者,亦可從各感應線之輸出訊號除去副感應線之訊號(雜訊訊號)。從而,可更確實除去雜訊。 According to the above configuration, the sensing line and the sub sensing line are provided in the same surface (the same surface) of the touch panel. Therefore, any of the output signals of the sensing line and the auxiliary sensing line include various kinds of noise signals reflected by the touch panel. Furthermore, the subtraction unit obtains the difference between the output signal of the sensing line including the signal of the touch operation and the noise signal, and the output signal of the auxiliary sensing line including the noise signal. Thereby, the noise component is removed from the output signal of the sensing line, and the original signal of the touch operation is captured. Therefore, it is possible to surely remove (eliminate) various noises reflected by the touch panel. Furthermore, the signal (noise signal) of the secondary sensing line can be removed from the output signal of each sensing line. Thereby, the noise can be removed more surely.
進而,根據上述構成,使感應線與副感應線鄰接,即,感應線與副感應線配置為最接近,且感應線與副感應線成大致相同條件之配置狀態。因此,包含於副感應線之輸出 訊號中之雜訊訊號值係可視為與感應線之輸出訊號所含之雜訊信號值相同。藉此,利用減算部之減算處理,可確實消除於觸控面板反映之雜訊成分。從而,可進一步提高觸控操作之檢測感度。 Further, according to the above configuration, the sensing line is adjacent to the sub sensing line, that is, the sensing line and the sub sensing line are arranged closest to each other, and the sensing line and the sub sensing line are arranged in substantially the same condition. Therefore, the output included in the secondary sensing line The noise signal value in the signal can be regarded as the same as the noise signal value contained in the output signal of the sensing line. Thereby, the noise reduction component reflected by the touch panel can be surely eliminated by the subtraction processing of the subtraction unit. Thereby, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be further improved.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述減算部包含第3 AD轉換部,其用以將類比訊號轉換成數位訊號;上述減算部在利用第3 AD轉換部將從上述感應線或上述副感應線取得之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號後,藉由算出該數位訊號之差分,而算出上述第1差分、上述第2差分、及上述第3差分。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the subtraction unit may include a third AD conversion unit for converting the analog signal into a digital signal; and the subtraction unit may use the third AD conversion unit from the sensing line or After the analog signal obtained by the sub sensing line is converted into a digital signal, the first difference, the second difference, and the third difference are calculated by calculating a difference between the digital signals.
根據上述構成,藉由將自觸控面板輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號後進行減算處理,可除去雜訊。 According to the above configuration, the noise can be removed by converting the analog signal output from the touch panel into a digital signal and performing a subtraction process.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述減算部包含第4 AD轉換部,其將類比訊號轉換成數位訊號;上述減算部在算出從上述感應線或上述副感應線取得之類比訊號之差分後,藉由利用上述第4 AD轉換部將該類比訊號之差分轉換成數位訊號,而算出上述第1差分、上述第2差分、及上述第3差分。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the subtraction unit may include a fourth AD conversion unit that converts the analog signal into a digital signal, and the subtraction unit calculates an analog signal obtained from the sensing line or the sub sensing line. After the difference, the difference between the analog signals is converted into a digital signal by the fourth AD conversion unit, and the first difference, the second difference, and the third difference are calculated.
根據上述構成,藉由對自觸控面板輸出之類比訊號直接進行類比訊號之減算處理後,將其轉換成數位訊號,可除去雜訊。 According to the above configuration, after the analog signal is directly subtracted from the analog signal output from the touch panel, the analog signal is converted into a digital signal to remove the noise.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述減算部較好進而包含:全差動放大器,其係藉由算出自上述感應線或上述副感應線取得之類比訊號的差分,算出上述第1差分、上述第2差 分、及上述第3差分。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the subtracting unit preferably further includes: a fully differential amplifier that calculates the first difference and the first difference by calculating a difference between the analog signals obtained from the sensing line or the sub sensing line Second difference The third difference is the same as the above.
根據上述構成,利用全差動放大器對自觸控面板輸出之類比訊號直接進行類比訊號減算處理後,轉換為數位訊號,可除去雜訊。 According to the above configuration, the analog signal output from the touch panel is directly subjected to the analog signal subtraction processing by the fully differential amplifier, and then converted into a digital signal to remove the noise.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述全差動放大器較好為其輸入共模電壓範圍為軌對軌動作。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the full differential amplifier preferably has an input common mode voltage range of rail-to-rail operation.
根據上述構成,包含可進行軌對軌(rail to rail)動作之全差動放大器。藉此,全差動放大器可在電源電壓(Vdd)至GND之電壓範圍內進行動作。從而,自全差動放大器之輸出訊號不會產生輸出飽和問題。 According to the above configuration, a fully differential amplifier that can perform a rail-to-rail operation is included. Thereby, the fully differential amplifier can operate within the voltage range of the power supply voltage (Vdd) to GND. Thus, the output signal from the fully differential amplifier does not cause an output saturation problem.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述加算部係自與上述副感應線距離較近者依序進行加算處理,並將加算結果用於下一次加算處理。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the addition unit may perform the addition processing in order from the closer to the sub-sensing line, and use the addition result for the next addition processing.
根據上述構成,加算部係一邊利用加算結果一邊依遠離副感應線之方向順次進行加算處理。從而,可提高加算處理速度。 According to the above configuration, the addition unit sequentially performs the addition processing in the direction away from the sub sensing line while using the addition result. Thereby, the addition processing speed can be increased.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述副感應線不檢測上述觸控面板之觸控操作。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the sub sensing line may not detect the touch operation of the touch panel.
根據上述構成,由於觸控操作之訊號未由副感應線檢測,故副感應線之輸出訊號中未包含觸控操作之訊號。藉此,利用減算部之減算處理,不會降低觸控操作之訊號值。即,可不降低由感應線檢測之觸控操作訊號,而可除去雜訊成分。因此,可更進一步提高觸控操作之檢測感度。 According to the above configuration, since the signal of the touch operation is not detected by the sub sensing line, the output signal of the sub sensing line does not include the signal of the touch operation. Thereby, the subtraction processing by the subtraction unit does not reduce the signal value of the touch operation. That is, the noise component can be removed without reducing the touch operation signal detected by the sensing line. Therefore, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be further improved.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,上述副感應線設置於上述觸控面板上不被觸控操作之區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the sub sensing line may be disposed on an area of the touch panel that is not touch-operated.
根據上述構成,副感應線係避開使用者進行觸控操作之區域(觸控區域)而設置。因此,副感應線雖檢測使用者未觸控操作時反映於觸控面板之雜訊,但不檢測觸控操作之訊號。因此,副感應線可確實避免檢測觸控操作。 According to the above configuration, the sub sensing line is provided in a region (touch area) in which the user performs the touch operation. Therefore, the secondary sensing line detects the noise reflected on the touch panel when the user does not touch the operation, but does not detect the signal of the touch operation. Therefore, the secondary sensing line can surely avoid detecting touch operations.
即,根據上述構成,由於觸控操作之訊號未被副感應線檢測,故副感應線輸出訊號中未包含觸控操作之訊號。藉此,利用減算部之減算處理,不會降低觸控操作之訊號值。即,可不降低由感應線檢測之觸控操作訊號,而可消除雜訊成分。因此,可更進一步提高觸控操作之檢測感度。 That is, according to the above configuration, since the signal of the touch operation is not detected by the sub sensing line, the signal of the touch operation is not included in the output signal of the sub sensing line. Thereby, the subtraction processing by the subtraction unit does not reduce the signal value of the touch operation. That is, the noise component can be eliminated without reducing the touch operation signal detected by the sensing line. Therefore, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be further improved.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為,上述驅動線驅動電路對於通過上述有效區域之各根上述驅動線賦予針對上述每根驅動線設定之固有之上述碼序列,且對於未通過上述有效區域之上述各根驅動線不賦予上述碼序列。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, it is preferable that the drive line drive circuit applies the code sequence unique to each of the drive lines to each of the drive lines passing through the effective area, and is effective for failing to pass the above-described The above-described respective drive lines of the area are not assigned to the above code sequence.
根據上述構成,觸控面板控制器係更容易地識別藉由觸控操作而產生之感應訊號之變動。 According to the above configuration, the touch panel controller more easily recognizes the variation of the sensing signal generated by the touch operation.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述觸控面板控制器較好進而包含:放大部,用以選擇性放大通過上述有效區域之上述感應線之訊號。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the touch panel controller preferably further includes: an amplifying portion for selectively amplifying the signal passing through the sensing line of the effective area.
根據上述構成,可防止感應線訊號之無用放大。從而可減少感應線訊號放大之電力消耗。 According to the above configuration, useless amplification of the sensing line signal can be prevented. Thereby, the power consumption of the induction line signal amplification can be reduced.
本發明之觸控面板中,上述觸控面板控制器較好進而包 含:訊號取得部,其選擇性取得通過上述有效區域之上述感應線訊號且分時輸出。 In the touch panel of the present invention, the touch panel controller is preferably further packaged The signal acquisition unit selectively acquires the sensing line signal passing through the effective area and outputs the time division.
根據上述構成,可防止於訊號取得部後段之無用訊號輸出。因此,可降低訊號取得部後段處理之電力消耗。 According to the above configuration, the useless signal output in the subsequent stage of the signal acquisition unit can be prevented. Therefore, the power consumption of the subsequent processing of the signal acquisition unit can be reduced.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述區域設定部較好設定包含上述觸控資訊之一部分即觸控位置之新的上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the area setting unit preferably sets the new effective area including the touch position which is one of the touch information.
根據上述構成,區域設定部係可繼而設定包含觸控位置可能性較高之新有效區域。 According to the above configuration, the area setting unit can then set a new effective area including a higher possibility of the touch position.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述區域設定部較好為設定上述觸控資訊之一部分即觸控位置之、與移動速度相應的大小之新的上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the area setting unit preferably sets the new effective area of a size corresponding to the moving speed of the touch position, which is one of the touch information.
根據上述構成,區域設定部係可繼而設定包含觸控位置可能性較高之新有效區域。 According to the above configuration, the area setting unit can then set a new effective area including a higher possibility of the touch position.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為,上述區域設定部在上述觸控面板控制器未檢測出觸控操作時,設定成為上述觸控面板整面之新上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, preferably, the area setting unit sets the new effective area that is the entire surface of the touch panel when the touch panel controller does not detect the touch operation.
根據上述構成,之後即使觸控面板上任一位置成為觸控位置,觸控面板控制器亦可檢測該觸控位置。 According to the above configuration, the touch panel controller can detect the touch position even if any position on the touch panel becomes the touch position.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,亦可為,在選擇第1模式時,上述區域設定部係基於上述觸控資訊之一部分的觸控位置而設定新上述有效區域,且在選擇第2模式時,上述區域設定部持續設定成為上述觸控面板整面之新上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, when the first mode is selected, the area setting unit may set the new effective area based on the touch position of one of the touch information, and when the second mode is selected The area setting unit continuously sets the new effective area that is the entire surface of the touch panel.
根據上述構成,例如對應於觸控面板系統之設置環境或使用環境等,能以謀求降低電力消耗及提升觸控操作檢測感度之第1模式、及從觸控面板整面無遺漏地檢測觸控位置之第2模式之任一模式,使觸控面板系統動作。 According to the configuration described above, for example, in accordance with the installation environment or the use environment of the touch panel system, the first mode in which the power consumption is reduced and the sensitivity of the touch operation detection can be improved, and the touch can be detected from the entire surface of the touch panel. In any mode of the second mode of the position, the touch panel system is operated.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為,上述觸控資訊中包含複數個觸控位置時,上述區域設定部基於該複數個觸控位置,設定新上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, preferably, when the touch information includes a plurality of touch positions, the area setting unit sets the new effective area based on the plurality of touch positions.
根據上述構成,在觸控面板控制器檢測複數個觸控位置之情形(多點觸控)中,區域設定部亦可設定有效區域。 According to the above configuration, in the case where the touch panel controller detects a plurality of touch positions (multi-touch), the area setting unit can also set the effective area.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為,上述區域設定部基於上述複數個觸控位置而設定新上述有效區域時,分別設定對應於上述各觸控位置之複數個新上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, preferably, the area setting unit sets a plurality of new effective areas corresponding to the touch positions when the new effective area is set based on the plurality of touch positions.
根據上述構成,在區域設定部設定之各個有效區域之間,可設置間隙(非有效區域之區域)。從而,可縮小區域設定部所設定之有效區域之總面積。 According to the above configuration, a gap (a region of the non-effective area) can be provided between the effective areas set by the area setting unit. Therefore, the total area of the effective area set by the area setting unit can be reduced.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為,對上述區域設定部所設定之新上述有效區域之個數設定有上限值。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, it is preferable that an upper limit value is set for the number of the new effective areas set by the area setting unit.
根據上述構成,區域設定部可設定之有效區域個數係限制在上限值以下。因此,可抑制區域設定部之運算量過剩,及區域設定部所設定之有效區域之總面積過大。 According to the above configuration, the number of effective regions that can be set by the region setting unit is limited to the upper limit value or lower. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an excessive amount of calculation of the area setting unit and an excessively large total area of the effective area set by the area setting unit.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為,上述區域設定部在每個特定之時序,設定成為上述觸控面板整面之新上述有效區域。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, it is preferable that the area setting unit sets a new effective area that is the entire surface of the touch panel at each specific timing.
根據上述構成,區域設定部即使在對應於利用觸控面板 控制器依序檢測之觸控位置來依序設定有效區域之動作(點驅動)開始後,於觸控面板上其他部位進行觸控操作,亦由於以特定之時序來設定成為觸控面板整面之有效區域,故而使觸控面板控制器亦可檢測該觸控位置。 According to the above configuration, the area setting unit corresponds to the use of the touch panel The controller sequentially detects the touch position to sequentially set the effective area (point drive), and then performs touch operation on other parts of the touch panel, and also sets the touch panel as a whole at a specific timing. The effective area, so that the touch panel controller can also detect the touch position.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述碼序列亦可為正交序列或M序列。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the code sequence may also be an orthogonal sequence or an M sequence.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,較好為進而包含顯示裝置,且上述觸控面板設置於上述顯示裝置之正面。 Preferably, the touch panel system of the present invention further includes a display device, and the touch panel is disposed on a front surface of the display device.
根據上述構成,由於觸控面板係設置於顯示裝置之正面,故可確實消除顯示裝置所產生之雜訊。 According to the above configuration, since the touch panel is provided on the front surface of the display device, the noise generated by the display device can be surely eliminated.
本發明之觸控面板系統中,上述顯示裝置較好為液晶顯示器、電漿顯示器、或有機EL顯示器、場發射顯示器。 In the touch panel system of the present invention, the display device is preferably a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, or an organic EL display or a field emission display.
根據上述構成,顯示裝置係由多用於日常性電子機器之各種顯示器所構成。從而,可提供通用性較高之觸控面板系統。 According to the above configuration, the display device is constituted by various displays that are mostly used in everyday electronic devices. Thereby, a highly versatile touch panel system can be provided.
本發明之電子機器為解決上述課題,其特徵在於包含上述任一觸控面板系統。 In order to solve the above problems, the electronic device of the present invention includes any of the above touch panel systems.
因此,可提供一種可確實去除(消除)於觸控面板反映之多種類雜訊之電子機器。 Therefore, an electronic machine capable of surely removing (eliminating) various types of noise reflected by the touch panel can be provided.
如上所述,本發明之觸控面板系統之構成包含:減算部,其接收來自上述主感應部之訊號,且算出彼此鄰接之感應線訊號之差分。即,減算部係取得雜訊相關性更高,且彼此鄰接之感應線間之差分訊號值。藉此,從主感應部 之輸出訊號中除去雜訊成分,並擷取觸控操作原本之訊號。從而,可發揮確實除去(消除)於觸控面板反映之多種類雜訊之效果。 As described above, the touch panel system of the present invention includes a subtraction unit that receives a signal from the main sensing unit and calculates a difference between adjacent sensing line signals. That is, the subtraction unit obtains a differential signal value between the sensing lines that have higher noise correlation and are adjacent to each other. From this, from the main sensor The noise signal is removed from the output signal, and the original signal of the touch operation is captured. Therefore, the effect of surely removing (eliminating) various types of noise reflected by the touch panel can be exerted.
此外,本發明之觸控面板系統係基於檢測之觸控位置,將應進行觸控位置檢測之區域即有效區域限定地設定於觸控面板內。因此,藉由避免無用之檢測,可降低電力消耗並提升觸控操作之檢測感度。 In addition, the touch panel system of the present invention limits the effective area of the area where the touch position detection should be performed to the touch panel based on the detected touch position. Therefore, by avoiding useless detection, power consumption can be reduced and the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be improved.
以下,基於圖式針對本發明之實施形態加以說明。又,本發明之實施形態雖具有下述第1特徵及第二特徵兩者(或一者),但以下基於便於說明而言,分別說明第1特徵及第2特徵。 Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Further, although the embodiment of the present invention has both the first feature and the second feature described below, the first feature and the second feature will be described below for convenience of explanation.
[實施形態1] [Embodiment 1]
(1)觸控面板系統1之構成 (1) The composition of the touch panel system 1
圖1係顯示本發明之第1實施形態之觸控面板系統1之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1包含:顯示裝置2、觸控面板3、觸控面板控制器4、及驅動線驅動電路5,且具有去除雜訊功能。下文中,以使用者所利用側作為正面(或上方)加以說明。 FIG. 1 is a schematic view showing a basic configuration of a touch panel system 1 according to a first embodiment of the present invention. The touch panel system 1 includes a display device 2, a touch panel 3, a touch panel controller 4, and a driving line driving circuit 5, and has a function of removing noise. Hereinafter, the side used by the user will be described as the front side (or upper side).
顯示裝置2係包含未圖示之顯示畫面(顯示部)。顯示畫面中顯示操作用之各種圖標、或使用者之操作指示所對應之文字資訊等。顯示裝置2係例如以液晶顯示器、電漿顯示器、有機EL顯示器、及場發射顯示器(FED;field emission display)等構成。該等顯示器多用於日常性電子機器,故可構成通用性較高之觸控面板系統1。顯示裝置2可使用任意構成,並無特別限定。 The display device 2 includes a display screen (display portion) not shown. Various icons for operation and text information corresponding to the operation instructions of the user are displayed on the display screen. The display device 2 is, for example, a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a field emission display (FED; field Emission display). These displays are mostly used in everyday electronic devices, and thus can constitute a highly versatile touch panel system 1. The display device 2 can be of any configuration and is not particularly limited.
觸控面板3係利用使用者的手指或筆等,藉由觸控(按壓)操作觸控面板3之表面,來輸入各種操作指示。觸控面板3係以覆蓋顯示畫面之方式,層積於顯示裝置2之正面(上部)。 The touch panel 3 inputs various operation instructions by operating (touching) the surface of the touch panel 3 by a user's finger or a pen. The touch panel 3 is laminated on the front surface (upper portion) of the display device 2 so as to cover the display screen.
觸控面板3包含設置於同一面上(同一面內)之2個感應器(主感應器31、副感應器32各一個)。主感應器31與副感應器32係彼此鄰接而設置。主感應器31與副感應器32均為靜電電容方式之感應器。設置有靜電電容方式之感應器的觸控面板3之透過率高且亦具有耐久性之優點。 The touch panel 3 includes two sensors (one for each of the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32) disposed on the same surface (in the same plane). The main inductor 31 and the sub sensor 32 are disposed adjacent to each other. The main inductor 31 and the sub sensor 32 are both capacitive sensors. The touch panel 3 provided with the electrostatic capacitance type sensor has a high transmittance and durability.
主感應器(主感應部)31係設置於觸控面板3上之觸控操作區域(觸控區域)內,用以檢測使用者對觸控面板3之觸控操作。觸控操作包含雙點擊操作、滑動操作、單點擊操作、及拖曳操作等。主感應器31具備包含線狀電極之感應線33。感應線33之一端係連接於觸控面板控制器4。藉此,以主感應器31檢測之訊號經由感應線33輸出至觸控面板控制器4。即,對應於由主感應器31檢測之觸控操作之訊號係輸出至觸控面板控制器4。 The main sensor (main sensing portion) 31 is disposed in the touch operation area (touch area) of the touch panel 3 to detect the touch operation of the touch panel 3 by the user. Touch operations include double click operations, sliding operations, single click operations, and drag operations. The main inductor 31 is provided with an induction line 33 including a linear electrode. One end of the sensing line 33 is connected to the touch panel controller 4. Thereby, the signal detected by the main sensor 31 is output to the touch panel controller 4 via the sensing line 33. That is, the signal corresponding to the touch operation detected by the main sensor 31 is output to the touch panel controller 4.
副感應器(副感應部)32係檢測於觸控面板3反映之雜訊成分。副感應器32係設置於觸控面板3上之未被觸控操作之區域內(非觸控區域)。因此,副感應器32未被使用者藉由觸控操作而接觸,僅檢測觸控面板系統1產生之各種雜 訊。藉此,副感應器32與主感應器31不同,未檢測觸控操作所對應之訊號。即,副感應器32係未被使用者藉由觸控操作而接觸,僅檢測觸控面板3所產生之雜訊。 The sub sensor (sub sensor unit) 32 detects the noise component reflected by the touch panel 3 . The sub-sensor 32 is disposed in the area of the touch panel 3 that is not touch-operated (non-touch area). Therefore, the sub sensor 32 is not touched by the user through the touch operation, and only the various miscellaneous generated by the touch panel system 1 is detected. News. Thereby, the sub sensor 32 is different from the main sensor 31 in that the signal corresponding to the touch operation is not detected. That is, the sub sensor 32 is not touched by the user by the touch operation, and only the noise generated by the touch panel 3 is detected.
副感應器32具備包含線狀電極之副感應線34。副感應線34係平行於感應線33(與感應線33延伸於同一方向)。副感應線34之一端連接觸控面板控制器4。藉此,由副感應器32檢測之訊號經由副感應線34輸出至觸控面板控制器4。 The sub sensor 32 has a sub sensing line 34 including a linear electrode. The secondary sensing line 34 is parallel to the sensing line 33 (extending in the same direction as the sensing line 33). One end of the secondary sensing line 34 is connected to the touch panel controller 4. Thereby, the signal detected by the sub sensor 32 is output to the touch panel controller 4 via the sub sensing line 34.
另一方面,觸控面板3包含驅動線35,其以正交於感應線33及副感應線34之方式交叉。驅動線35係包含線狀電極者。感應線33或副感應線34與驅動線35之交叉部分形成有靜電電容。即,感應線33與驅動線35之間、及副感應線34與驅動線35之間各自形成有靜電電容。驅動線35連接於驅動線驅動電路(感應器驅動部)5,且當觸控面板系統1啟動時,以一定週期對驅動線35施加電位。 On the other hand, the touch panel 3 includes a driving line 35 that intersects the sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34 in an orthogonal manner. The drive line 35 is a wire electrode. An electrostatic capacitance is formed between the sensing line 33 or the intersection of the sub sensing line 34 and the driving line 35. That is, an electrostatic capacitance is formed between the sensing line 33 and the driving line 35 and between the sub sensing line 34 and the driving line 35. The drive line 35 is connected to the drive line drive circuit (sensor drive unit) 5, and when the touch panel system 1 is activated, a potential is applied to the drive line 35 at a certain period.
感應線33、副感應線34、及驅動線35皆可由例如ITO(Indium Thin Oxide:氧化銦錫)等透明配線材料形成。感應線33、副感應線34、及驅動線35亦可稱為觸控面板3之感應電極。 The sensing line 33, the sub sensing line 34, and the driving line 35 can be formed of a transparent wiring material such as ITO (Indium Thin Oxide). The sensing line 33, the secondary sensing line 34, and the driving line 35 may also be referred to as sensing electrodes of the touch panel 3.
另,驅動線35係設置於透明基板或透明薄膜(未圖示)上。再者,驅動線35由絕緣層(未圖示)所覆蓋。該絕緣層上,設置有感應線33及副感應線34。藉此,感應線33或副感應線34與驅動線35係介隔絕緣層彼此絕緣,且電容耦合。感應線33及副感應線34係由保護層(未圖示)所覆蓋。即,觸控面板3中,保護層被配置於最正面側(使用者側)。 Further, the drive line 35 is provided on a transparent substrate or a transparent film (not shown). Furthermore, the drive line 35 is covered by an insulating layer (not shown). The insulating layer 33 and the sub sensing line 34 are provided on the insulating layer. Thereby, the sensing line 33 or the auxiliary sensing line 34 and the driving line 35 are insulated from each other by the insulating layer and are capacitively coupled. The sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34 are covered by a protective layer (not shown). That is, in the touch panel 3, the protective layer is disposed on the most front side (user side).
觸控面板控制器4係讀取自觸控面板3之主感應器31及副感應器32輸入之訊號(資料)。觸控面板系統1由於包含靜電電容方式之感應器,故觸控面板控制器4係檢測觸控面板3產生之靜電電容。具體而言,觸控面板控制器4係檢測感應線33-驅動線35間之靜電電容變化、及副感應線34-驅動線35間之靜電電容變化。觸控面板控制器4係具備減算部41、座標檢測部42(觸控檢測部)、及CPU43。 The touch panel controller 4 reads signals (data) input from the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 of the touch panel 3. Since the touch panel system 1 includes an electrostatic capacitance type sensor, the touch panel controller 4 detects the electrostatic capacitance generated by the touch panel 3. Specifically, the touch panel controller 4 detects a change in electrostatic capacitance between the sensing line 33 and the driving line 35 and a change in electrostatic capacitance between the auxiliary sensing line 34 and the driving line 35. The touch panel controller 4 includes a subtraction unit 41, a coordinate detecting unit 42 (touch detecting unit), and a CPU 43.
減算部41包含:輸入端子(主感應器輸出用之輸入端子),其用以接收自主感應器31輸出之訊號;及輸入端子(副感應器輸出用之輸入端子),其用以接收自副感應器32輸出之訊號。減算部41從輸入至主感應器輸出用之輸入端子之訊號中減去輸入至副感應器輸出用之輸入端子之訊號。以減算部41進行減算處理之訊號輸出至座標檢測部42。另,輸入至減算部41之訊號可為數位訊號,亦可為類比訊號。即,向減算部41輸入之訊號只要為對應於減算部41之構成之訊號即可。 The subtraction unit 41 includes an input terminal (an input terminal for outputting the main inductor) for receiving a signal output from the autonomous sensor 31, and an input terminal (an input terminal for outputting the sub sensor) for receiving the slave The signal output by the sensor 32. The subtraction unit 41 subtracts the signal input to the input terminal for the sub-sensor output from the signal input to the input terminal for the main inductor output. The signal subjected to the subtraction processing by the subtraction unit 41 is output to the coordinate detecting unit 42. In addition, the signal input to the subtraction unit 41 can be a digital signal or an analog signal. In other words, the signal input to the subtraction unit 41 may be a signal corresponding to the configuration of the subtraction unit 41.
座標檢測部42係基於由減算部41進行減算處理之訊號,來檢測有無觸控操作之資訊。例如,座標檢測部42在自減算部41之輸出訊號值達到特定臨限值以上時,將「有」觸控操作之訊號輸出至CPU43。另,觸控面板系統1中,由於主感應器31為單數,故座標檢測部42係檢測有無觸控操作之資訊。另一方面,主感應器31為複數之情形,座標檢測部42亦檢測使用者之觸控位置座標值。 The coordinate detecting unit 42 detects the presence or absence of the information of the touch operation based on the signal subjected to the subtraction processing by the subtraction unit 41. For example, when the output signal value of the self-subtraction unit 41 reaches a certain threshold or more, the coordinate detecting unit 42 outputs a signal of the "touch" touch operation to the CPU 43. In the touch panel system 1, since the main sensor 31 is singular, the coordinate detecting unit 42 detects the presence or absence of information on the touch operation. On the other hand, when the main sensor 31 is plural, the coordinate detecting unit 42 also detects the user's touch position coordinate value.
CPU43係以一定間隔取得自座標檢測部42輸出之資訊, 且根據取得之資訊輸入至顯示裝置2等。 The CPU 43 acquires the information output from the coordinate detecting unit 42 at regular intervals. And input to the display device 2 or the like based on the obtained information.
驅動線驅動電路5連接於驅動線35,在觸控面板系統1啟動時,以一定週期對驅動線35施加電位。 The drive line drive circuit 5 is connected to the drive line 35, and when the touch panel system 1 is activated, a potential is applied to the drive line 35 at a constant period.
(2)觸控面板系統1之雜訊處理 (2) Noise processing of touch panel system 1
觸控面板系統1係基於由觸控面板控制器4檢測之靜電電容之變化,來檢測觸控操作之有無。但,觸控面板3係接著於顯示裝置2之正面(使用者側)。因此,觸控面板系統1不僅受顯示裝置2產生之時脈等雜訊影響,亦容易受到其他外來雜訊之影響。其結果將致使觸控操作之檢測感度(座標檢測部42之檢測感度)下降。 The touch panel system 1 detects the presence or absence of a touch operation based on a change in electrostatic capacitance detected by the touch panel controller 4. However, the touch panel 3 is followed by the front side (user side) of the display device 2. Therefore, the touch panel system 1 is not only affected by noises such as clocks generated by the display device 2, but also susceptible to other external noise. As a result, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation (detection sensitivity of the coordinate detecting unit 42) is lowered.
故,作為消除此種雜訊之對策,使觸控面板系統1包含副感應器32與減算部41。基於圖2,對觸控面板系統1之雜訊消除處理加以說明。圖2係顯示觸控面板系統1之基本處理,即雜訊消除處理之流程圖。 Therefore, as a countermeasure against such noise, the touch panel system 1 includes the sub sensor 32 and the subtraction unit 41. The noise cancellation processing of the touch panel system 1 will be described based on FIG. 2 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system 1, that is, the noise cancellation processing.
若啟動觸控面板系統1,則以一定週期自驅動線驅動電路5將電位施加至驅動線35。若使用者對觸控面板3進行觸控操作,則主感應器31及副感應器32之兩感應器將訊號輸出至減算部41。 When the touch panel system 1 is activated, a potential is applied from the drive line drive circuit 5 to the drive line 35 at a certain period. When the user performs a touch operation on the touch panel 3, the two sensors of the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 output signals to the subtraction unit 41.
此處,顯示裝置2所產生之時脈等雜訊、及其他外來雜訊係反映於觸控面板3。因此,主感應器31及副感應器32檢測各種雜訊成分。即,自主感應器31之輸出訊號係對觸控操作原本之訊號上加算雜訊訊號(雜訊成分)。另一方面,副感應器32未檢測觸控操作。因此,自副感應器32之輸出訊號中包含有雜訊訊號(雜訊成分),但未包含觸控操 作之訊號(F201)。 Here, noise such as a clock generated by the display device 2 and other external noise are reflected on the touch panel 3. Therefore, the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 detect various noise components. That is, the output signal of the autonomous sensor 31 adds a noise signal (noise component) to the original signal of the touch operation. On the other hand, the sub sensor 32 does not detect the touch operation. Therefore, the output signal from the sub-sensor 32 includes a noise signal (noise component), but does not include a touch operation. Signal (F201).
觸控面板系統1中,主感應器31與副感應器32係設置於同一面內,且彼此鄰接設置。因此,主感應器31之輸出訊號中所包含之雜訊訊號值、與副感應器32之輸出訊號中所包含之雜訊訊號值可視為本質相同之值。故觸控面板控制器4內之減算部41係實行從主感應器31之輸入訊號(訊號值)中減去副感應器32之輸入訊號(信號值)的處理(F202)。即,減算部41係取得感應線33與副感應線34之差分。藉此,從主感應器31之輸出訊號中除去雜訊訊號。從而,取得藉由觸控操作而產生之觸控操作原本之訊號值。 In the touch panel system 1, the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 are disposed in the same plane and are disposed adjacent to each other. Therefore, the noise signal value included in the output signal of the main sensor 31 and the noise signal value included in the output signal of the sub-sensor 32 can be regarded as substantially the same value. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41 in the touch panel controller 4 performs a process of subtracting the input signal (signal value) of the sub sensor 32 from the input signal (signal value) of the main sensor 31 (F202). In other words, the subtraction unit 41 acquires the difference between the sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34. Thereby, the noise signal is removed from the output signal of the main sensor 31. Therefore, the original signal value of the touch operation generated by the touch operation is obtained.
經過此種減算處理之訊號(觸控操作原本之訊號)被輸出至觸控面板控制器4內存在之座標檢測部42(F203)。藉此,將觸控操作原本之訊號輸出至座標檢測部42。座標檢測部42係藉由觸控操作原本之訊號處理,來檢測觸控操作之有無。從而,可抑制座標檢測部42之檢測感度(檢測有無觸控操作之精度等)下降。 The signal (the original signal of the touch operation) subjected to such subtraction processing is output to the coordinate detecting portion 42 (F203) existing in the touch panel controller 4. Thereby, the original signal of the touch operation is output to the coordinate detecting unit 42. The coordinate detecting unit 42 detects the presence or absence of the touch operation by the original signal processing of the touch operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the detection sensitivity of the coordinate detecting unit 42 (detecting the accuracy of the touch operation or the like) from falling.
如此,觸控面板系統1中,減算部41係取得感應線33與副感應線34之差分,且從包含多種雜訊成分之來自感應線33之輸入訊號中消除雜訊成分。即,減算部41係從感應線33之輸入訊號中除去雜訊訊號,且擷取由觸控操作產生之原本之訊號。從而,可提供一種能確實消除多種類雜訊之觸控面板系統1。 As described above, in the touch panel system 1, the subtraction unit 41 obtains the difference between the sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34, and eliminates the noise component from the input signal from the sensing line 33 including a plurality of types of noise components. That is, the subtraction unit 41 removes the noise signal from the input signal of the sensing line 33, and extracts the original signal generated by the touch operation. Thus, a touch panel system 1 capable of reliably eliminating a plurality of types of noise can be provided.
另一方面,若將觸控面板系統1之雜訊消除處理可視化顯示,則如圖3所示。圖3係顯示觸控面板系統1中由減算 部41處理之訊號之波形之圖。圖3(a)係顯示主感應器31之輸出訊號,圖3(b)係顯示副感應器32之輸出訊號,圖3(c)係顯示經減算部41處理後之訊號。圖3所示之各訊號係使用者觸控操作時之訊號。 On the other hand, if the noise cancellation processing of the touch panel system 1 is visually displayed, as shown in FIG. Figure 3 shows the reduction in the touch panel system 1 A diagram of the waveform of the signal processed by section 41. 3(a) shows the output signal of the main sensor 31, FIG. 3(b) shows the output signal of the sub sensor 32, and FIG. 3(c) shows the signal processed by the subtraction unit 41. Each of the signals shown in FIG. 3 is a signal when the user touches the operation.
觸控面板系統1中,若使用者進行觸控操作,則檢測觸控操作之主感應器31之電容增加(圖3(a))。即,自主感應器(感應線33)之輸出訊號值增加。但,觸控操作時之自主感應器31之輸出訊號中,不僅加算了觸控操作原本之訊號,亦加算有各種雜訊(顯示裝置2產生之時脈等雜訊、及外來雜訊)訊號。 In the touch panel system 1, if the user performs a touch operation, the capacitance of the main sensor 31 for detecting the touch operation is increased (FIG. 3(a)). That is, the output signal value of the autonomous sensor (induction line 33) is increased. However, in the output signal of the autonomous sensor 31 during the touch operation, not only the original signal of the touch operation but also various noises (such as the clock generated by the display device 2 and the external noise) are added. .
另一方面,由於副感應器32未檢測觸控操作,故副感應器32(副感應線)之電容未因觸控操作而增加。即,自副感應器32之輸出訊號中,未包含觸控操作訊號,但包含有於觸控面板3反映之雜訊成分(圖3(b))。 On the other hand, since the sub sensor 32 does not detect the touch operation, the capacitance of the sub sensor 32 (sub sense line) is not increased by the touch operation. That is, the output signal from the sub-sensor 32 does not include the touch operation signal, but includes the noise component reflected by the touch panel 3 (FIG. 3(b)).
減算部41係從自主感應器31之輸出訊號中減去自副感應器32之輸出訊號(圖3(a)之訊號值-圖3(b)之訊號值)。藉由該減算處理,如圖3(c)所示,從自主感應器31之輸出訊號中除去自副感應器32輸出之雜訊成分。從而,取得因觸控操作產生之觸控操作原本之訊號。再者,因將觸控操作原本之訊號輸入座標檢測部42,故觸控操作之檢測精度未下降。 The subtraction unit 41 subtracts the output signal from the sub-sensor 32 (the signal value of Fig. 3(a) - the signal value of Fig. 3(b)) from the output signal of the auto sensor 31. By this subtraction processing, as shown in FIG. 3(c), the noise component output from the sub sensor 32 is removed from the output signal of the auto sensor 31. Thereby, the original signal of the touch operation generated by the touch operation is obtained. Furthermore, since the original signal of the touch operation is input to the coordinate detecting unit 42, the detection accuracy of the touch operation is not lowered.
如上所述,本實施形態之觸控面板系統1係將主感應器31與副感應器32設置於觸控面板3上之同一面內(同一面上)。藉此,來自主感應器31及副感應器32之任一輸出訊 號中亦包含於觸控面板3反映之各種雜訊訊號。再者,減算部41取得包含觸控操作之訊號與雜訊訊號之自主感應器31之輸出訊號、及包含雜訊訊號之自副感應器32之輸出訊號的差分。藉此,從主感應器31之輸出訊號中除去雜訊成分,而擷取觸控操作原本之訊號。從而,可確實除去(消除)於觸控面板3反映之多種類雜訊。 As described above, in the touch panel system 1 of the present embodiment, the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 are disposed in the same plane (same surface) of the touch panel 3. Thereby, any one of the output signals from the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 The number also includes various noise signals reflected on the touch panel 3. Furthermore, the subtraction unit 41 obtains the difference between the output signal of the autonomous sensor 31 including the signal of the touch operation and the noise signal, and the output signal of the slave sensor 32 including the noise signal. Thereby, the noise component is removed from the output signal of the main sensor 31, and the original signal of the touch operation is extracted. Therefore, various types of noise reflected by the touch panel 3 can be surely removed (eliminated).
另,專利文獻1之觸控面板系統中,作為除去對象之雜訊成分係包含雜訊成分之訊號中之AC訊號成分。相對於此,觸控面板系統1中,自主感應器31及副感應器32之輸出訊號中包含有各種雜訊成分。因此,作為觸控面板系統1中除去對象之雜訊成分不限定於AC訊號成分。故,觸控面板系統1係可消除於觸控面板3反映之所有雜訊。 Further, in the touch panel system of Patent Document 1, the noise component to be removed includes the AC signal component in the signal of the noise component. In contrast, in the touch panel system 1, the output signals of the autonomous sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 include various noise components. Therefore, the noise component to be removed as the touch panel system 1 is not limited to the AC signal component. Therefore, the touch panel system 1 can eliminate all the noise reflected by the touch panel 3.
觸控面板系統1中,副感應器32只要與主感應器31一起設於觸控面板3之同一面內即可。藉此,主感應器31及副感應器32皆可檢測反映於觸控面板3之雜訊成分(雜訊訊號)。但,副感應器32較好係不檢測觸控面板3之觸控操作。根據如此構成,由於觸控操作之訊號未被副感應器32檢測,故自副感應器32之輸出訊號中未包含觸控操作之訊號。藉此,利用減算部41之減算處理不會降低觸控操作之訊號值。即,由主感應器31檢測之觸控操作訊號未減少,但雜訊成分被除去。從而,可進一步提高觸控操作之檢測感度。 In the touch panel system 1 , the sub sensor 32 may be provided in the same plane as the touch panel 3 together with the main sensor 31 . Thereby, both the main sensor 31 and the sub sensor 32 can detect the noise component (noise signal) reflected on the touch panel 3. However, the sub sensor 32 preferably does not detect the touch operation of the touch panel 3. According to this configuration, since the signal of the touch operation is not detected by the sub sensor 32, the signal of the touch operation is not included in the output signal of the sub sensor 32. Thereby, the subtraction processing by the subtraction unit 41 does not lower the signal value of the touch operation. That is, the touch operation signal detected by the main sensor 31 is not reduced, but the noise component is removed. Thereby, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be further improved.
如觸控面板系統1般,副感應器32設置於觸控面板3上使用者未進行觸控操作之區域(非觸控區域)時,觸控操作之 訊號未由副感應器32檢測。因此,副感應器32係檢測使用者未觸控操作時反映於觸控面板之雜訊,但不檢測觸控操作之訊號。從而,副感應器32可確實避免檢測觸控操作。 For example, when the touch panel system 1 is used, the sub sensor 32 is disposed on the touch panel 3 (the non-touch area) where the user does not perform the touch operation. The signal is not detected by the secondary sensor 32. Therefore, the sub sensor 32 detects the noise reflected by the touch panel when the user does not touch the operation, but does not detect the touch operation signal. Thus, the secondary sensor 32 can surely avoid detecting touch operations.
由副感應器32檢測雜訊成分時,副感應器32較好係儘量設置於主感應器31之附近,且更好係鄰接主感應器31而設置。藉此,主感應器31與副感應器32係配置成大致相同之條件。尤其,在副感應器32鄰接於主感應器31而設置時,主感應器31與副感應器32係配置得最為接近。因此,自副感應器32之輸出訊號所包含之雜訊訊號值係可視作與自主感應器31之輸出訊號所包含之雜訊訊號值相同。藉此,藉由減算部41之減算處理,可更確實除去於觸控面板3反映之雜訊成分。從而,可更進一步提高觸控操作之檢測感度。 When the noise component is detected by the sub sensor 32, the sub sensor 32 is preferably disposed in the vicinity of the main inductor 31 as much as possible, and is preferably disposed adjacent to the main inductor 31. Thereby, the main inductor 31 and the sub sensor 32 are arranged under substantially the same conditions. In particular, when the sub-sensor 32 is disposed adjacent to the main inductor 31, the main inductor 31 and the sub-sensor 32 are disposed closest to each other. Therefore, the noise signal value included in the output signal of the slave sensor 32 can be regarded as the same as the noise signal value included in the output signal of the autonomous sensor 31. Thereby, the noise component reflected by the touch panel 3 can be more reliably removed by the subtraction processing by the subtraction unit 41. Thereby, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be further improved.
本實施形態中,對包含靜電電容方式之觸控面板3之觸控面板系統1加以說明。但,觸控面板3之動作原理(感應器之動作方式)並未限定於靜電電容方式。例如,包含電阻膜方式、紅外線方式、超音波方式、或電磁感應耦合方式之觸控面板之觸控面板系統亦同樣可發揮雜訊消除功能。此外,可無關顯示裝置2之種類而發揮雜訊消除功能。 In the present embodiment, the touch panel system 1 including the capacitive touch panel 3 will be described. However, the principle of operation of the touch panel 3 (the operation mode of the sensor) is not limited to the electrostatic capacitance method. For example, a touch panel system including a resistive film method, an infrared method, an ultrasonic method, or an electromagnetic induction coupling type touch panel system can also perform a noise canceling function. Further, the noise canceling function can be exerted regardless of the type of the display device 2.
本實施形態之觸控面板系統1可應用於觸控面板式之各種電子機器。作為電子機器,可例舉電視、電腦、行動電話、數位相機、行動遊戲機、電子相框、行動資訊終端(PDA:Personal Digital Assistant,個人數位助理)、電子 書、家電製品(微波爐、洗衣機等)、售票機、ATM(Automated Teller Machine,自動櫃員機)、及車用導航裝置等。藉此,可提供一種能有效抑制觸控操作之檢測感度下降之電子機器。 The touch panel system 1 of the present embodiment can be applied to various electronic devices of the touch panel type. As the electronic device, a television, a computer, a mobile phone, a digital camera, an action game machine, an electronic photo frame, a mobile information terminal (PDA: Personal Digital Assistant, personal digital assistant), and an electronic device can be exemplified. Books, home appliances (microwave ovens, washing machines, etc.), ticket vending machines, ATM (Automated Teller Machine), and car navigation devices. Thereby, an electronic device capable of effectively suppressing a decrease in detection sensitivity of a touch operation can be provided.
[實施形態2] [Embodiment 2]
(1)觸控面板系統1a之構成 (1) The composition of the touch panel system 1a
圖4係顯示本發明之其他觸控面板系統1a之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1a之基本構成係大致與實施形態1之觸控面板系統1相同。以下,以與觸控面板系統1之差異點為中心,對觸控面板系統1a加以說明。另,為便於說明,與實施形態1所說明之圖式具有相同功能之構件係附註同一符號,並省略說明。 Fig. 4 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of another touch panel system 1a of the present invention. The basic configuration of the touch panel system 1a is substantially the same as that of the touch panel system 1 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the touch panel system 1a will be described centering on the difference from the touch panel system 1. For the sake of convenience of explanation, members having the same functions as those of the drawings described in the first embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described.
觸控面板系統1a中,設置於觸控面板3a之感應器之構成不同於觸控面板系統1。即,觸控面板3a包含主感應器群31a,其包含複數個主感應器31;及副感應器群32a,其包含複數個副感應器32。觸控面板系統1a不僅檢測使用者有無觸控操作,亦檢測使用者觸控操作之位置資訊(座標)。 In the touch panel system 1a, the configuration of the sensor provided on the touch panel 3a is different from that of the touch panel system 1. That is, the touch panel 3a includes a main sensor group 31a including a plurality of main sensors 31, and a sub-sensor group 32a including a plurality of sub-sensors 32. The touch panel system 1a detects not only the user's touch operation but also the location information (coordinates) of the user's touch operation.
具體而言,觸控面板系統1a中,觸控面板3a在觸控面板3a之同一面上(同一面內)包含主感應器群31a、及副感應器群32a。主感應器群31a與副感應器群32a係彼此鄰接而設置。主感應器群31a及副感應器群32a均由靜電電容方式之感應器構成。 Specifically, in the touch panel system 1a, the touch panel 3a includes a main sensor group 31a and a sub sensor group 32a on the same surface (in the same plane) of the touch panel 3a. The main sensor group 31a and the sub sensor group 32a are disposed adjacent to each other. Each of the main sensor group 31a and the sub-sensor group 32a is constituted by a capacitive inductor.
主感應器群(主感應部)31a係設置於觸控面板3a上進行觸控操作之區域(觸控區域),用以檢測使用者對觸控面板3a 之觸控操作。主感應器群31a係由配置成格子狀之複數個主感應器31構成。主感應器群31a係具備L根(L為2以上整數)感應線33。各感應線33相互平行,且等間隔設置。各感應線33上配置有M個(M為2以上整數)主感應器31。 The main sensor group (main sensing portion) 31a is disposed on the touch panel 3a to perform a touch operation area (touch area) for detecting the user to the touch panel 3a. Touch operation. The main sensor group 31a is composed of a plurality of main inductors 31 arranged in a lattice shape. The main sensor group 31a includes L (L is an integer of 2 or more) sensing lines 33. The sensing lines 33 are parallel to each other and are disposed at equal intervals. M (M is an integer of 2 or more) main inductor 31 is disposed on each of the sensing lines 33.
各感應線33之一端連接於觸控面板控制器4之減算部41。藉此,由主感應器31檢測之訊號係經由各感應線33輸出至減算部41。即,將由主感應器31檢測之觸控操作所對應之訊號輸出至減算部41。 One end of each of the sensing lines 33 is connected to the subtraction unit 41 of the touch panel controller 4. Thereby, the signal detected by the main sensor 31 is output to the subtraction unit 41 via the respective sensing lines 33. That is, the signal corresponding to the touch operation detected by the main sensor 31 is output to the subtraction unit 41.
副感應器群(副感應部)32a檢測於觸控面板3a反映之雜訊成分。副感應器群32a設置於觸控面板3a上未進行觸控操作之區域(非觸控區域)。因此,副感應器群32a未被使用者藉由觸控操作而接觸,而檢測觸控面板系統1a所產生之各種雜訊。藉此,副感應器群32a與主感應器群31a不同,不檢測觸控操作所對應之訊號。即,副感應器群32a係未被使用者藉由觸控操作而接觸,而檢測感應器所產生之雜訊。副感應器群32a包含一根副感應線34。副感應線34平行於各感應線33(在與感應線33相同方向延伸)。於副感應線34上配置M個(M為2以上整數)副感應器32。即,配置於各感應線33上之主感應器31之個數與配置在副感應線34上之副感應器32之個數相同。 The sub sensor group (sub sensor unit) 32a detects the noise component reflected by the touch panel 3a. The sub sensor group 32a is disposed in an area (non-touch area) on the touch panel 3a where no touch operation is performed. Therefore, the sub sensor group 32a is not touched by the user by the touch operation, and various noises generated by the touch panel system 1a are detected. Thereby, the sub sensor group 32a is different from the main sensor group 31a, and does not detect the signal corresponding to the touch operation. That is, the sub sensor group 32a is not touched by the user by the touch operation, and the noise generated by the sensor is detected. The secondary sensor group 32a includes a secondary sensing line 34. The secondary sensing line 34 is parallel to each of the sensing lines 33 (extending in the same direction as the sensing line 33). M (M is an integer of 2 or more) sub-sensors 32 are disposed on the sub-sensing line 34. That is, the number of the main inductors 31 disposed on the respective sensing lines 33 is the same as the number of the sub-sensors 32 disposed on the sub-sensing line 34.
副感應線34之一端連接於觸控面板控制器4之減算部41。藉此,由副感應器群32a檢測之訊號經由副感應線34輸出至減算部41。 One end of the sub sensing line 34 is connected to the subtraction unit 41 of the touch panel controller 4. Thereby, the signal detected by the sub sensor group 32a is output to the subtraction unit 41 via the sub sensing line 34.
另一方面,觸控面板3a包含M根(M為2以上整數)驅動線 35,其以正交於各感應線33及副感應線34之方式交叉。各驅動線35係彼此平行,且等間隔設置。各驅動線35上配置有L個(L為2以上整數)主感應器31、及1個副感應器32。再者,於各感應線33或副感應線34與各驅動線35之交叉部分形成靜電電容。即,各感應線33與各驅動線35之間、及副感應線34與各驅動線35之間分別形成靜電電容。驅動線35連接於未圖示之驅動線驅動電路,且當觸控面板系統1a啟動時,以一定週期於驅動線35施加電位。 On the other hand, the touch panel 3a includes M (M is an integer of 2 or more) driving lines 35, which intersects orthogonally to each of the sensing lines 33 and the sub sensing lines 34. The drive lines 35 are parallel to each other and are disposed at equal intervals. L (L is an integer of 2 or more) main inductor 31 and one sub sensor 32 are arranged on each drive line 35. Further, an electrostatic capacitance is formed at an intersection of each of the sensing lines 33 or the sub sensing lines 34 and the respective driving lines 35. That is, a capacitance is formed between each of the sensing lines 33 and each of the driving lines 35 and between the sub sensing lines 34 and the respective driving lines 35. The drive line 35 is connected to a drive line drive circuit (not shown), and when the touch panel system 1a is activated, a potential is applied to the drive line 35 at a predetermined period.
藉此,觸控面板3a中,設置於橫方向之感應線33及副感應線34、與設置於縱方向之驅動線35係配置成二維矩陣狀。另,感應線33、副感應線34、及驅動線35之根數、長度、寬、及間隔等可依據觸控面板系統1a之用途或觸控面板3a之尺寸等而任意設定。 Thereby, in the touch panel 3a, the sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34 provided in the lateral direction and the driving line 35 provided in the longitudinal direction are arranged in a two-dimensional matrix. The number, length, width, and interval of the sensing line 33, the sub sensing line 34, and the driving line 35 can be arbitrarily set according to the use of the touch panel system 1a or the size of the touch panel 3a.
(2)觸控面板系統1a之雜訊處理 (2) Noise processing of touch panel system 1a
觸控面板系統1a係基於由觸控面板控制器4檢測之靜電電容之變化,而檢測觸控操作之有無及觸控位置。但,觸控面板系統1a亦與觸控面板系統1相同,易受各種雜訊影響。從而致使觸控操作之檢測感度(座標檢測部之檢測感度)下降。具體而言,圖5係顯示圖4之觸控面板系統1a中,未包含副感應器群32a之觸控面板3b之概略圖。如圖5所示,觸控面板3b僅包含主感應器群31a,而未包含副感應器群32a。即,圖5之觸控面板3b係雜訊對策前之構成。該情形下,觸控面板3b受到各種雜訊影響。從而致使自各感應線33輸出之訊號中包含有各種雜訊成分,令觸控操作 之檢測感度下降。 The touch panel system 1a detects the presence or absence of a touch operation and a touch position based on a change in electrostatic capacitance detected by the touch panel controller 4. However, the touch panel system 1a is also the same as the touch panel system 1, and is susceptible to various noises. As a result, the detection sensitivity of the touch operation (detection sensitivity of the coordinate detecting portion) is lowered. Specifically, FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the touch panel 3b of the touch panel system 1a of FIG. 4 without the sub sensor group 32a. As shown in FIG. 5, the touch panel 3b includes only the main sensor group 31a, and does not include the sub sensor group 32a. That is, the touch panel 3b of FIG. 5 is configured before the noise countermeasure. In this case, the touch panel 3b is affected by various noises. Therefore, the signals output from the sensing lines 33 include various noise components to make the touch operation The detection sensitivity is reduced.
故,作為除去此種雜訊之對策,觸控面板系統1a係包含副感應器群32a與減算部41。基於圖6,對觸控面板系統1a之雜訊消除處理加以說明。圖6係顯示觸控面板系統1a之基本處理的雜訊消除處理之流程圖。 Therefore, as a measure for removing such noise, the touch panel system 1a includes the sub sensor group 32a and the subtraction unit 41. The noise canceling processing of the touch panel system 1a will be described based on FIG. FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing the noise canceling process of the basic processing of the touch panel system 1a.
當啟動觸控面板系統1a時,以一定週期對驅動線35施加電位。使用者若對觸控面板3a進行觸控操作,則主感應器群31a及副感應器群32a之兩個感應器群將訊號輸出至減算部41。具體而言,若使用者進行觸控操作,則對應於觸控位置之特定主感應器31之電容增加。即,來自該主感應器31(感應線33)之輸出訊號值增加。觸控面板系統1a一邊驅動各驅動線35,一邊將來自感應線33及副感應線34之輸出訊號輸出至減算部41。 When the touch panel system 1a is activated, a potential is applied to the drive line 35 at a certain period. When the touch operation is performed on the touch panel 3a, the two sensor groups of the main sensor group 31a and the sub sensor group 32a output signals to the subtraction unit 41. Specifically, if the user performs a touch operation, the capacitance of the specific main sensor 31 corresponding to the touch position increases. That is, the output signal value from the main inductor 31 (sensing line 33) is increased. The touch panel system 1a outputs the output signals from the induction line 33 and the sub-sensing line 34 to the subtraction unit 41 while driving the drive lines 35.
更詳細而言,顯示裝置2所產生之時脈等雜訊、及其他外來雜訊會反映於觸控面板3a。因此以在主感應器群31a及副感應器群32a檢測各種雜訊成分。即,來自主感應器群31a之輸出訊號中,對觸控操作原本之訊號加上雜訊訊號(雜訊成分)。另一方面,副感應器群32a不檢測觸控操作。因此,自副感應器群32a之輸出訊號中雖然包含雜訊成分(雜訊成分),但未包含觸控操作之訊號(F501)。 More specifically, noise such as a clock generated by the display device 2 and other external noise are reflected on the touch panel 3a. Therefore, various noise components are detected in the main sensor group 31a and the sub sensor group 32a. That is, the output signal from the main sensor group 31a adds a noise signal (noise component) to the original signal of the touch operation. On the other hand, the sub sensor group 32a does not detect the touch operation. Therefore, although the noise signal (noise component) is included in the output signal of the sub sensor group 32a, the signal of the touch operation (F501) is not included.
觸控面板系統1a中,主感應器群31a與副感應器群32a係設置於同一面內,且彼此鄰接設置。因此,主感應器群31a之輸出訊號中所包含之雜訊訊號值、與副感應器群32a之輸出訊號即雜訊訊號值基本上可視為相同之值。因此, 存在於觸控面板控制器4內之減算部41係實行從來自主感應器群31a之輸入訊號(訊號值)中減去來自副感應器群32a之輸入訊號(信號值)的處理(F502)。即,減算部41係取各感應線33與副感應線34之差分。藉此,從來自主感應器群31a之輸出訊號中除去雜訊訊號。從而得到由觸控操作產生之觸控操作原本之訊號值。 In the touch panel system 1a, the main sensor group 31a and the sub sensor group 32a are disposed in the same plane, and are disposed adjacent to each other. Therefore, the noise signal value included in the output signal of the main sensor group 31a and the noise signal value of the output signal of the sub sensor group 32a can be regarded as substantially the same value. therefore, The subtraction unit 41 existing in the touch panel controller 4 performs a process of subtracting the input signal (signal value) from the sub sensor group 32a from the input signal (signal value) of the auto sensor group 31a (F502). That is, the subtraction unit 41 extracts the difference between each of the sensing lines 33 and the sub sensing lines 34. Thereby, the noise signal is removed from the output signal of the autonomous sensor group 31a. Thereby, the original signal value of the touch operation generated by the touch operation is obtained.
經過此種減算處理之訊號被輸出至存在於觸控面板控制器4內之座標檢測部42(F503)。藉此,將觸控操作原本之訊號輸出至座標檢測部42。座標檢測部42藉由觸控操作原本之訊號處理,而檢測觸控操作之有無及觸控位置(座標)。從而,可抑制座標檢測部42之檢測感度(觸控操作有無之檢測精度、及觸控位置之檢測感度等)下降。 The signal subjected to such subtraction processing is output to the coordinate detecting portion 42 (F503) existing in the touch panel controller 4. Thereby, the original signal of the touch operation is output to the coordinate detecting unit 42. The coordinate detecting unit 42 detects the presence or absence of the touch operation and the touch position (coordinate) by the original signal processing of the touch operation. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the detection sensitivity of the coordinate detecting unit 42 (the detection accuracy of the touch operation or the detection sensitivity of the touch position, etc.).
另,觸控面板系統1a中,來自包含對應於觸控位置之特定主感應器31之感應線33之輸出訊號具有如圖3(a)所示之波形,且來自副感應器群32a(副感應線34)輸出之訊號具有圖3(b)所示之波形。減算部41從來自主感應器群31a之輸出訊號中減去來自副感應器群32之輸出訊號。藉由該減算處理,如圖3(c)所示,從來自主感應器群31a之輸出訊號中除去自副感應器群32a輸出之雜訊成分。從而,得到由觸控操作產生之觸控操作原本之訊號。再者,由於觸控操作原本之訊號被輸入至座標檢測部42,故觸控操作之檢測精度及觸控位置之檢測精度均未下降。因此,可縮小實際觸控位置與由座標檢測部42檢測之檢測位置之偏差。 In addition, in the touch panel system 1a, the output signal from the sensing line 33 including the specific main sensor 31 corresponding to the touch position has a waveform as shown in FIG. 3(a), and is from the sub-sensor group 32a (sub The signal output from the sensing line 34) has the waveform shown in Figure 3(b). The subtraction unit 41 subtracts the output signal from the sub-sensor group 32 from the output signal of the autonomous sensor group 31a. By this subtraction processing, as shown in FIG. 3(c), the noise component output from the sub-sensor group 32a is removed from the output signal of the autonomous sensor group 31a. Thereby, the original signal of the touch operation generated by the touch operation is obtained. Furthermore, since the original signal of the touch operation is input to the coordinate detecting unit 42, the detection accuracy of the touch operation and the detection accuracy of the touch position are not lowered. Therefore, the deviation between the actual touch position and the detected position detected by the coordinate detecting unit 42 can be reduced.
如上所述,觸控面板系統1a係一邊驅動驅動線35,一邊 由感應線33讀取由使用者進行觸控操作引起之主感應器群31a之電容值之變化。又,由副感應線34中讀取雜訊成分。再者,在減算部41中,可取得感應線33與副感應線34之差分,並除去(消除)雜訊成分。 As described above, the touch panel system 1a drives the drive line 35 while driving The change in the capacitance value of the main sensor group 31a caused by the touch operation by the user is read by the sensing line 33. Further, the noise component is read from the sub sensing line 34. Further, in the subtraction unit 41, the difference between the sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34 can be obtained, and the noise component can be removed (eliminated).
觸控面板系統1a之主感應器群31a係由在縱方向及橫方向上配置成矩陣狀之複數個主感應器31構成。藉此,除了與觸控面板1相同之效果外,亦可由座標檢測部42檢測經觸控之座標。即,可檢測觸控操作之有無,且檢測觸控位置(座標值)。 The main sensor group 31a of the touch panel system 1a is composed of a plurality of main inductors 31 arranged in a matrix in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction. Thereby, in addition to the same effect as the touch panel 1, the coordinate detecting unit 42 can detect the touched coordinates. That is, the presence or absence of the touch operation can be detected, and the touch position (coordinate value) can be detected.
與觸控面板系統1相同,觸控面板系統1a中,作為除去對象之雜訊成分亦不限定於AC訊號成分。因此,觸控面板系統1a亦可消除於觸控面板3a反映之所有雜訊。 Similarly to the touch panel system 1, in the touch panel system 1a, the noise component to be removed is not limited to the AC signal component. Therefore, the touch panel system 1a can also eliminate all the noise reflected by the touch panel 3a.
[實施形態3] [Embodiment 3]
(1)觸控面板系統1b之構成 (1) The composition of the touch panel system 1b
圖7係顯示本發明之其他觸控面板系統1b之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1b之基本構成大致與實施形態2之觸控面板系統1a相同。以下,以與觸控面板系統1a之差異點為中心,對觸控面板系統1b加以說明。另,為便於說明,與實施形態1、2所說明之圖式具有相同功能之構件係附註同一符號,並省略說明。 Fig. 7 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of another touch panel system 1b of the present invention. The basic configuration of the touch panel system 1b is substantially the same as that of the touch panel system 1a of the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the touch panel system 1b will be described centering on the difference from the touch panel system 1a. For the sake of convenience of explanation, members having the same functions as those of the drawings described in the first and second embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described.
觸控面板3b係與實施形態2之觸控面板系統1a之觸控面板3a為相同構成。即,觸控面板3b包含:複數根(圖7中為5根)驅動線35;複數根(圖7中為7根)感應線33,該等係交叉於各驅動線35;及1根副感應線34,其正交於各驅動線 35,且與感應線33平行。感應線33與驅動線35、及副感應線34與驅動線35係分別相互絕緣,且電容耦合。 The touch panel 3b has the same configuration as the touch panel 3a of the touch panel system 1a of the second embodiment. That is, the touch panel 3b includes: a plurality of (five in FIG. 7) driving lines 35; a plurality of (seven in FIG. 7) sensing lines 33, which intersect with each driving line 35; and one pair Inductive line 34, which is orthogonal to each drive line 35, and parallel to the sensing line 33. The sensing line 33 and the driving line 35, and the sub sensing line 34 and the driving line 35 are insulated from each other and capacitively coupled.
以下,將包含1根副感應線34與7根感應線33之8根感應/副感應線排列作為排列(1)~排列(8)加以區別並說明。 Hereinafter, eight inductive/secondary sensing line arrays including one sub sensing line 34 and seven sensing lines 33 will be described as an arrangement (1) to an array (8).
觸控面板控制器4係自輸入側依序包含:開關SW、減算部41、儲存部45a~45d、及加算部46。另,雖未圖示,但觸控面板控制器4亦包含座標檢測部42及CPU43(圖1)。藉此,觸控面板系統1b之觸控面板控制器4之構成與觸控面板系統1、1a不同。 The touch panel controller 4 includes, in order from the input side, a switch SW, a subtraction unit 41, storage units 45a to 45d, and an addition unit 46. Although not shown, the touch panel controller 4 also includes a coordinate detecting unit 42 and a CPU 43 (FIG. 1). Thereby, the touch panel controller 4 of the touch panel system 1b is configured differently from the touch panel systems 1, 1a.
開關SW係將從感應線33或副感應線34輸入至減算部41之訊號進行切換。更詳細而言,開關SW包含上下兩個端子,且選擇其中一個端子。圖7係開關SW選擇下側端子之狀態。 The switch SW switches the signal input from the sensing line 33 or the sub sensing line 34 to the subtraction unit 41. In more detail, the switch SW includes two upper and lower terminals, and one of the terminals is selected. Fig. 7 shows the state in which the switch SW selects the lower terminal.
減算部41進行由開關SW所選擇之排列(1)~(8)之訊號之差分訊號處理。即,減算部41進行鄰接之感應線33間之差分訊號處理、及鄰接之感應線33與副感應線34之差分訊號處理。例如如圖7所示,在開關SW選擇下側端子之情形時,減算部41進行排列(8)-排列(7)、排列(6)-排列(5)、排列(4)-排列(3)、及排列(2)-排列(1)之各差分訊號處理。另一方面,雖然未圖示,但在開關SW選擇上側端子之情形時,減算部41進行排列(7)-排列(6)、排列(5)-排列(4)、及排列(3)-排列(2)之各差分訊號處理。 The subtraction unit 41 performs differential signal processing of the signals of the arrays (1) to (8) selected by the switch SW. In other words, the subtraction unit 41 performs differential signal processing between the adjacent sensing lines 33 and differential signal processing between the adjacent sensing lines 33 and the sub sensing lines 34. For example, as shown in FIG. 7, when the switch SW selects the lower terminal, the subtraction unit 41 performs arrangement (8)-arrangement (7), arrangement (6)-arrangement (5), arrangement (4)-arrangement (3). ), and arrange the differential signal processing of (2)-arrangement (1). On the other hand, although not shown, when the switch SW selects the upper terminal, the subtraction unit 41 performs arrangement (7)-arrangement (6), arrangement (5)-arrangement (4), and arrangement (3)- Arrange the differential signal processing of (2).
儲存部45a~45d儲存在開關SW選擇一端子時由減算部41進行差分處理之訊號(差分處理訊號)。儲存於儲存部 45a~45d之差分處理訊號係輸出至加算部46。另,在開關SW選擇另一端子時,差分處理訊號係未經由儲存部45a~45d,而直接輸出至加算部46。 The storage units 45a to 45d store signals (differential processing signals) that are subjected to differential processing by the subtraction unit 41 when the switch SW selects one terminal. Stored in storage The differential processing signals of 45a to 45d are output to the addition unit 46. Further, when the switch SW selects the other terminal, the differential processing signal is directly output to the addition unit 46 without passing through the storage units 45a to 45d.
加算部46係對自減算部41及儲存部45a~45d輸入之鄰接感應線33之差分處理訊號進行加算,且輸出經加算處理結果。又,加算部46輸出儲存於儲存部45a之副感應線34、及與其鄰接之感應線33之差分處理訊號(排列(2)-排列(1))。加算部46最終輸出排列(2)-排列(1)、排列(3)-排列(1)、排列(4)-排列(1)、排列(5)-排列(1)、排列(6)-排列(1)、排列(7)-排列(1)、排列(8)排列(1)之各訊號。即,自加算部46輸出之訊號已除去感應線33所包含之雜訊訊號(排列(1)之訊號)。且減算部41進行鄰接感應線33間之差分訊號處理。從而,自加算部46輸出更確實除去了雜訊訊號之訊號。 The adding unit 46 adds the difference processing signals of the adjacent sensing lines 33 input from the subtracting unit 41 and the storage units 45a to 45d, and outputs the added processing result. Further, the adding unit 46 outputs a difference processing signal (arrangement (2)-arrangement (1)) stored in the sub sensing line 34 of the storage unit 45a and the sensing line 33 adjacent thereto. The adding unit 46 finally outputs the arrangement (2) - arrangement (1), arrangement (3) - arrangement (1), arrangement (4) - arrangement (1), arrangement (5) - arrangement (1), arrangement (6) - Arrange the signals of (1), Arrange (7) - Arrange (1), Arrange (8) Arrange (1). That is, the signal output from the adding unit 46 has removed the noise signal (the signal of the array (1)) included in the sensing line 33. Further, the subtraction unit 41 performs differential signal processing between the adjacent sensing lines 33. Therefore, the self-addition unit 46 outputs a signal that more surely removes the noise signal.
(2)觸控面板系統1b之雜訊處理 (2) Noise processing of touch panel system 1b
基於圖7及圖8,對觸控面板系統1b之雜訊處理加以說明。圖8係顯示觸控面板系統1b之基本處理即雜訊消除處理之流程圖。 The noise processing of the touch panel system 1b will be described based on FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system 1b, that is, the noise canceling processing.
啟動觸控面板系統1b時,以特定週期對驅動線35施加電位。於使用者對觸控面板3b進行觸控操作時,與觸控位置對應之特定之感應線33的電容增加。即,自該感應線33輸出之訊號值增加。觸控面板系統1b係一邊驅動各驅動線35,一邊將自感應線33及副感應線34之輸出訊號輸出至觸控面板控制器4。藉此,觸控面板系統1b一邊驅動驅動線 35,一邊檢測感應線33及副感應線34之電容變化,且檢測觸控操作之有無及觸控位置。 When the touch panel system 1b is activated, a potential is applied to the drive line 35 at a specific cycle. When the user performs a touch operation on the touch panel 3b, the capacitance of the specific sensing line 33 corresponding to the touch position increases. That is, the signal value output from the sensing line 33 is increased. The touch panel system 1b outputs the output signals of the self-sensing line 33 and the sub-sensing line 34 to the touch panel controller 4 while driving the respective driving lines 35. Thereby, the touch panel system 1b drives the driving line on one side 35, detecting the change of the capacitance of the sensing line 33 and the sub sensing line 34, and detecting the presence or absence of the touch operation and the touch position.
更詳細而言,顯示裝置2產生之時脈等雜訊、及其他外來雜訊於觸控面板3b中反映。因此,於主感應器群31a及副感應器群32a,檢測各種雜訊成分。即,自感應線33之輸出訊號係於觸控操作原本之訊號中加算雜訊訊號(雜訊成分)。另一方面,副感應線34不檢測觸控操作。因此,自副感應線34之輸出訊號雖然包含雜訊成分(雜訊成分),但未包含觸控操作之訊號(F601)。 More specifically, noise such as a clock generated by the display device 2 and other external noise are reflected in the touch panel 3b. Therefore, various noise components are detected in the main sensor group 31a and the sub sensor group 32a. That is, the output signal of the self-sensing line 33 is added to the original signal of the touch operation to add a noise signal (noise component). On the other hand, the secondary sensing line 34 does not detect the touch operation. Therefore, although the output signal from the auxiliary sensing line 34 includes a noise component (noise component), it does not include a touch operation signal (F601).
其次,開關SW選擇下側端子(F602)。接著,於減算部41取得感應線33(感應線Sn)、與鄰接於該感應線33之2根感應線33中靠近副感應線34之感應線(感應線Sn+1)間之差分(感應線(Sn+1)-Sn:第1差分)。此時,最靠近副感應線34之感應線33係取得與副感應線34之差分(第3差分)(F603)。 Next, the switch SW selects the lower terminal (F602). Next, the subtraction unit 41 obtains a difference between the sensing line 33 (induction line Sn) and the sensing line (induction line Sn+1) adjacent to the sub sensing line 34 of the two sensing lines 33 adjacent to the sensing line 33 (induction) Line (Sn+1)-Sn: first difference). At this time, the sensing line 33 closest to the sub sensing line 34 acquires a difference (third difference) from the sub sensing line 34 (F603).
在圖7之排列(1)~(8)時,減算部41進行 In the arrangement (1) to (8) of Fig. 7, the subtraction unit 41 performs
.排列(2)-排列(1)(將該差分值作為A) . Arrange (2) - Arrange (1) (take the difference value as A)
.排列(4)-排列(3)(將該差分值作為C) . Arrange (4) - Arrange (3) (take the difference value as C)
.排列(6)-排列(5)(將該差分值作為E) . Arrange (6)-arrange (5) (take the difference value as E)
.排列(8)-排列(7)(將該差分值作為G)之4種差分訊號處理。即,在步驟F603中,進行包含副感應線34之排列(1)~(8)之差分訊號處理。 . Four kinds of differential signals are processed by (8)-arrangement (7) (the difference value is referred to as G). That is, in step F603, the differential signal processing including the arrays (1) to (8) of the sub sensing lines 34 is performed.
由減算部41算出之差分值A、C、E、G係儲存於儲存部45a~45d。即,分別係儲存部45a儲存差分值A,儲存部45b儲存差分值C,儲存部45c儲存差分值E,儲存部45d儲存差 分值G(F604)。 The difference values A, C, E, and G calculated by the subtraction unit 41 are stored in the storage units 45a to 45d. That is, the storage unit 45a stores the difference value A, the storage unit 45b stores the difference value C, the storage unit 45c stores the difference value E, and the storage unit 45d stores the difference. Score G (F604).
繼而,將選擇下側端子之開關SW切換成選擇上側端子(關閉)(F605)。接著,在減算部41中,進行與F603相同之處理。即,進行感應線33(感應線Sn)、與鄰接於該感應線33之2根感應線33中遠離副感應線34之感應線(感應線Sn-1)間之差分訊號處理((感應線Sn-(Sn-1)):第2差分)(F606)。 Then, the switch SW that selects the lower terminal is switched to select the upper terminal (closed) (F605). Next, the subtraction unit 41 performs the same processing as F603. That is, differential signal processing (inductive line) between the sensing line 33 (sensing line Sn) and the sensing line (sensing line Sn-1) away from the sub sensing line 34 of the two sensing lines 33 adjacent to the sensing line 33 is performed. Sn-(Sn-1): second difference) (F606).
在圖7之排列(1)~(8)時,減算部41進行 In the arrangement (1) to (8) of Fig. 7, the subtraction unit 41 performs
.排列(3)-排列(2)(將該差分值作為B) . Arrange (3) - Arrange (2) (take the difference value as B)
.排列(5)-排列(4)(將該差分值作為D) . Arrange (5) - Arrange (4) (take the difference value as D)
.排列(7)-排列(6)(將該差分值作為F)之3種差分訊號處理。即,在步驟F606中,進行未包含副感應線34之排列(2)~(7)之差分訊號處理。 . Three kinds of differential signals are processed (7)-arranged (6) (the difference value is taken as F). That is, in step F606, the differential signal processing in which the arrays (2) to (7) of the sub sensing line 34 are not included is performed.
其次,加算部45進行在步驟F606求得之差分值B、D、F與儲存於儲存部45a~45d之差分值A、C、E、G之加算處理。即,對開關SW選擇下側端子之情形之差分值(差分值A、C、E、G)、與選擇上側端子之情形之差分值(差分值B、D、F)進行加算(F607)。 Next, the adding unit 45 performs the addition processing of the difference values B, D, and F obtained in step F606 and the difference values A, C, E, and G stored in the storage units 45a to 45d. In other words, the difference value (difference values A, C, E, G) in the case where the lower terminal is selected for the switch SW and the difference value (difference value B, D, F) in the case where the upper terminal is selected are added (F607).
圖7之排列(1)~(8)時,加算部46首先對儲存於儲存部45a之差分值A(排列(2)-排列(1)訊號)、與自減算部41輸出之差分值B(排列(3)-排列(2)訊號)進行加算。該加算處理係成為差分值A+差分值B={排列(2)-排列(1)}+{排列(3)-排列(2)}=排列(3)-排列(1)(將該差分值作為差分值H),可取得排列(3)-排列(1)之訊號。加算部46係依序進行此種處理。 In the arrangement (1) to (8) of Fig. 7, the adding unit 46 first compares the difference value A (arrangement (2) - arrangement (1) signal) stored in the storage unit 45a and the difference value B output from the self-subtraction unit 41. (Arrange (3) - Arrange (2) signals) for addition. This addition processing is a difference value A + difference value B = {arrangement (2) - permutation (1)} + {arrangement (3) - permutation (2)} = permutation (3) - permutation (1) (the difference value As the difference value H), the signal of the arrangement (3)-arrangement (1) can be obtained. The adding unit 46 performs such processing in order.
即,對該差分值H(排列(3)-排列(1)之訊號)加算儲存於 儲存部45b之差分值C(排列(4)-排列(3)之訊號)。其結果,可取得排列(4)-排列(1)之訊號(差分值I)。 That is, the difference value H (the signal of the arrangement (3)-arrangement (1)) is added and stored in The difference value C of the storage unit 45b (the signal of the arrangement (4) - arrangement (3)). As a result, the signal of the arrangement (4)-arrangement (1) (difference value I) can be obtained.
繼而,對該差分值I(排列(4)-排列(1)之訊號)加算自減算部41輸出之差分值D(排列(5)-排列(4)之訊號)。其結果,可取得排列(5)-排列(1)之訊號(差分值J)。 Then, the difference value I (the signal of the array (4) - array (1)) is added to the difference value D (the signal of the array (5) - array (4)) output from the subtraction unit 41. As a result, the signal of the arrangement (5)-arrangement (1) (difference value J) can be obtained.
接著,對該差分值J(排列(5)-排列(1)之訊號)加算儲存於儲存部45c之差分值E(排列(6)-排列(5)之訊號)。其結果,可取得排列(6)-排列(1)之訊號(差分值K)。 Next, the difference value J (the signal of the array (5) - array (1)) is added to the difference value E (the signal of the array (6) - array (5)) stored in the storage portion 45c. As a result, the signal of the arrangement (6)-arrangement (1) (difference value K) can be obtained.
其次,對該差分值K(排列(6)-排列(1)之訊號)加算自減算部41輸出之差分值F(排列(7)-排列(6)之訊號)。其結果,可取得排列(7)-排列(1)之訊號(差分值L)。 Next, the difference value K (the signal of the array (6)-arrangement (1)) is added to the difference value F (the signal of the array (7) - array (6)) output from the subtraction unit 41. As a result, the signal (difference value L) of the array (7)-arrangement (1) can be obtained.
接著,對該差分值L(排列(7)-排列(1)之訊號)加算儲存於儲存部45d之差分值G(排列(8)-排列(7)之訊號)。其結果,可取得排列(8)-排列(1)之訊號(差分值M)。 Next, the difference value L (the signal of the array (7) - array (1)) is added to the difference value G (the signal of the array (8) - array (7)) stored in the storage portion 45d. As a result, the signal (differential value M) of the array (8)-arrangement (1) can be obtained.
另,儲存於儲存部45a之差分值A(即,排列(2)-排列(1)之訊號)未經加算部46進行加算處理而直接輸出。 Further, the difference value A stored in the storage unit 45a (that is, the signal of the arrangement (2)-arrangement (1)) is directly outputted without addition processing by the addition unit 46.
如此,自加算部46輸出下列各訊號: Thus, the self-addition unit 46 outputs the following signals:
.排列(2)-排列(1)訊號=差分值A . Arrangement (2) - Arrangement (1) Signal = Differential Value A
.排列(3)-排列(1)訊號=差分值H . Arrangement (3) - Arrangement (1) Signal = Differential Value H
.排列(4)-排列(1)訊號=差分值I . Arrangement (4) - Arrangement (1) Signal = Differential Value I
.排列(5)-排列(1)訊號=差分值J . Arrangement (5) - Arrangement (1) Signal = Differential Value J
.排列(6)-排列(1)訊號=差分值K . Arrangement (6) - Arrangement (1) Signal = Differential Value K
.排列(7)-排列(1)訊號=差分值L . Arrangement (7)-arrangement (1) signal = differential value L
.排列(8)-排列(1)訊號=差分值M。 . Arrange (8) - Arrange (1) Signal = Differential Value M.
圖7中,排列(2)~排列(8)係感應線33,排列(1)為副感應線34。由加算部46之加算處理結果係從排列(2)~排列(8)之各訊號中除去排列(1)之訊號(雜訊訊號)。因此,自加算部46之輸出訊號成為已除去感應線33之訊號中所包含之雜訊訊號,且取得由觸控操作產生之觸控操作原本之訊號值。已除去雜訊訊號之自加算部46之輸出訊號係輸出至觸控面板控制器4內之座標檢測部42。即,觸控操作原本之訊號被輸出至座標檢測部42(F608)。 In Fig. 7, the array (2) to the array (8) are the sensing lines 33, and the array (1) is the sub sensing line 34. The result of the addition processing by the adding unit 46 removes the signal (noise signal) of the array (1) from the signals of the arrays (2) to (8). Therefore, the output signal of the self-addition unit 46 becomes the noise signal included in the signal from which the sensing line 33 has been removed, and the original signal value of the touch operation generated by the touch operation is obtained. The output signal of the self-addition unit 46 from which the noise signal has been removed is output to the coordinate detecting unit 42 in the touch panel controller 4. That is, the original signal of the touch operation is output to the coordinate detecting unit 42 (F608).
如上所述,觸控面板系統1b在鄰接之感應線33間取得差分訊號值。即,取得雜訊相關性更高之鄰接感應線33間之差分。再者,亦從各感應線33之輸出訊號中除去副感應線34之訊號(雜訊訊號)。因此,觸控面板系統1b與實施形態1、2之觸控面板系統1、1a相比,可更確實除去雜訊。 As described above, the touch panel system 1b obtains a differential signal value between adjacent sensing lines 33. That is, the difference between the adjacent sensing lines 33 with higher noise correlation is obtained. Furthermore, the signal (noise signal) of the secondary sensing line 34 is also removed from the output signal of each sensing line 33. Therefore, the touch panel system 1b can more reliably remove noise than the touch panel systems 1 and 1a of the first and second embodiments.
又,藉由從副感應線34側依序(距副感應線34較近開始依序)進行加算部46之加算處理,可一邊將加算處理結果用於後續之加算處理,一邊進行加算處理而除去雜訊。 In addition, the addition processing of the addition unit 46 is performed sequentially from the side of the sub-sensing line 34 (sequentially from the sub-sensing line 34), and the addition processing result can be used for the subsequent addition processing while performing the addition processing. Remove noise.
[實施形態4] [Embodiment 4]
本發明之觸控面板系統之驅動方法雖未特別限定,但較好為正交序列驅動方式。換言之,較好並列驅動驅動線35。圖9係顯示先前觸控面板系統中觸控面板之驅動方式之圖。圖10係顯示本發明之觸控面板系統中觸控面板之驅動方式(正交序列驅動方式)之圖。 Although the driving method of the touch panel system of the present invention is not particularly limited, it is preferably an orthogonal sequence driving method. In other words, it is preferable to drive the drive line 35 in parallel. FIG. 9 is a view showing a driving manner of a touch panel in a previous touch panel system. FIG. 10 is a view showing a driving method (orthogonal sequence driving method) of a touch panel in the touch panel system of the present invention.
圖9係顯示自觸控面板擷取之1個感應線上存在4個感應器之情形。如圖9所示,先前之觸控面板系統在驅動驅動 線時,將+V伏特施加於驅動之驅動線上,且逐次對驅動線進行驅動。 FIG. 9 shows a case where four sensors are present on one sensing line drawn from the touch panel. As shown in Figure 9, the previous touch panel system is driven by the driver. At the time of the line, +V volts is applied to the driving line of the driving, and the driving line is driven successively.
具體而言,驅動線之第1次驅動係將+V伏特施加於最左側之感應器上。藉此,Vout之第1次測定結果(X1)係X1=C1×V/Cint。 Specifically, the first drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the leftmost sensor. Thereby, the first measurement result (X1) of Vout is X1=C1×V/Cint.
同樣,驅動線之第2次驅動係將+V伏特施加於左起第2個感應器上。藉此,Vout之第2次測定結果(X2)係X2=C2×V/Cint。 Similarly, the second drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the second sensor from the left. Thereby, the second measurement result (X2) of Vout is X2=C2×V/Cint.
驅動線之第3次驅動係將+V伏特施加於左起第3個感應器上。藉此,Vout之第3次測定結果(X3)係X3=C3×V/Cint。 The third drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the third sensor from the left. Thereby, the third measurement result (X3) of Vout is X3=C3×V/Cint.
驅動線之第4次驅動係將+V伏特施加於最右側之感應器上。藉此,Vout之第4次測定結果(X4)係X4=C4×V/Cint。 The fourth drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the rightmost sensor. Thereby, the fourth measurement result (X4) of Vout is X4=C4×V/Cint.
對此,圖10亦與圖9相同,顯示從觸控面板擷取之一個感應線上具有4個感應器之情形。如圖10所示,在正交序列驅動方式之情形下,當對驅動線進行驅動時,將+V伏特或-V伏特施加於所有驅動線上。即,正交序列驅動方式中,驅動線係被並列驅動。 In this regard, FIG. 10 is also the same as FIG. 9 and shows that there are four sensors on one sensing line drawn from the touch panel. As shown in FIG. 10, in the case of the orthogonal sequence driving method, when the driving line is driven, +V volts or -V volts is applied to all of the driving lines. That is, in the orthogonal sequence driving method, the driving lines are driven in parallel.
具體而言,驅動線之第1次驅動係將+V伏特施加於所有感應器上。藉此,Vout之第1次測定結果(Y1)係Y1=(C1+C2+C3+C4)×V/Cint。 Specifically, the first drive of the drive line applies +V volts to all of the inductors. Thereby, the first measurement result (Y1) of Vout is Y1=(C1+C2+C3+C4)×V/Cint.
驅動線之第2次驅動係將+V伏特施加於最左側之感應器上,將-V伏特施加於左起第2個感應器上,且將+V伏特施 加於左起第3個感應器上,並將-V伏特施加於最右側之感應器上。藉此,Vout之第2次測定結果(Y2)係Y2=(C1-C2+C3-C4)×V/Cint。 The second drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the leftmost sensor, and -V volts to the second sensor from the left, and +V volts Apply to the third sensor from the left and apply -V volts to the rightmost sensor. Thereby, the second measurement result (Y2) of Vout is Y2=(C1-C2+C3-C4)×V/Cint.
驅動線之第3次驅動係將+V伏特施加於最左側之感應器上,將+V伏特施加於左起第2個感應器上,且將-V伏特施加於左起第3個感應器上,並將-V伏特施加於最右側之感應器上。藉此,Vout之第3次測定結果(Y3)係Y3=(C1+C2-C3-C4)×V/Cint。 The third drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the leftmost sensor, +V volts to the second sensor from the left, and -V volts to the third sensor from the left Up and apply -V volts to the rightmost sensor. Thereby, the third measurement result (Y3) of Vout is Y3=(C1+C2-C3-C4)×V/Cint.
驅動線之第4次驅動係將+V伏特施加於最左側之感應器上,將-V伏特施加於左起第2個感應器上,且將-V伏特施加於左起第3個感應器上,並將+V伏特施加於最右側之感應器上。藉此,Vout之第4次測定結果(Y4)係Y4=(C1-C2-C3+C4)×V/Cint。 The fourth drive of the drive line applies +V volts to the leftmost sensor, -V volts to the second sensor from the left, and -V volts to the third sensor from the left Up and apply +V volts to the rightmost sensor. Thereby, the fourth measurement result (Y4) of Vout is Y4=(C1-C2-C3+C4)×V/Cint.
圖10中,電容值(C1、C2、C3、C4)之值可由輸出序列(Y1、Y2、Y3、Y4)與正交碼di之內積運算而求得。該公式之成立係由於正交碼di之正交性。此處碼di係顯示施加於各驅動線之正負電壓碼。即,碼d1係施加於最左側之感應器上之電壓碼,即「+1,+1,+1,+1」。碼d2係施加於左起第2個感應器上之電壓碼,即「+1,-1,+1,-1」。碼d3係施加於左起第3個感應器上之電壓碼,即「+1,+1,-1,-1」。碼d4係施加於最右側感應器上之電壓碼,即「+1,-1,-1,+1」。 In Fig. 10, the values of the capacitance values (C1, C2, C3, C4) can be obtained by the inner product of the output sequence (Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4) and the orthogonal code di. This formula is established due to the orthogonality of the orthogonal codes di. Here, the code di shows the positive and negative voltage codes applied to the respective drive lines. That is, the code d1 is a voltage code applied to the leftmost sensor, that is, "+1, +1, +1, +1". The code d2 is a voltage code applied to the second sensor from the left, that is, "+1, -1, +1, -1". The code d3 is a voltage code applied to the third sensor from the left, that is, "+1, +1, -1, -1". The code d4 is a voltage code applied to the rightmost sensor, that is, "+1, -1, -1, +1".
若由輸出序列Y1、Y2、Y3、Y4與碼d1、d2、d3、d4之內積運算求得C1、C2、C3、C4之值,則 C1=1×Y1+1×Y2+1×Y3+1×Y4=4C1×V/Cint If the values of C1, C2, C3, and C4 are obtained by the inner product of the output sequences Y1, Y2, Y3, and Y4 and the codes d1, d2, d3, and d4, then C1=1×Y1+1×Y2+1×Y3+1×Y4=4C1×V/Cint
C2=1×Y1+(-1)×Y2+1×Y3+(-1)×Y4=4C2×V/Cint C2=1×Y1+(-1)×Y2+1×Y3+(-1)×Y4=4C2×V/Cint
C3=1×Y1+1×Y2+(-1)×Y3+(-1)×Y4=4C3×V/Cint C3=1×Y1+1×Y2+(-1)×Y3+(-1)×Y4=4C3×V/Cint
C4=1×Y1+(-1)×Y2+(-1)×Y3+(-1)×Y4=4C3×V/Cint。 C4 = 1 × Y1 + (-1) × Y2 + (-1) × Y3 + (-1) × Y4 = 4C3 × V / Cint.
如此,藉由碼di之正交性,利用碼di與輸出序列Yi之內積運算求得Ci。若將該結果與圖9所示之先前驅動方式比較,則可在同一驅動次數中檢測4倍之值。圖11係顯示利用圖9之驅動方式之觸控面板為取得與圖10之驅動方式之觸控面板相同之感度所必須之處理之圖。如圖11所示,為以圖9之驅動方式來取得與圖10之驅動方式相同之感度,有必要重複進行4次同一驅動線之驅動,且加算該等結果。即,驅動線之驅動時間係成4倍。反言之,利用圖10所示之驅動方式,為取得與圖9所示先前之驅動方式相同之感度,驅動線之驅動時間係縮短到圖9所示之驅動方式時之1/4。從而,可降低觸控面板系統之電力消耗。 Thus, Ci is obtained by the inner product of the code di and the output sequence Yi by the orthogonality of the code di. If the result is compared with the previous driving mode shown in FIG. 9, a value of 4 times can be detected in the same number of driving times. FIG. 11 is a view showing a process necessary for obtaining the same sensitivity as the touch panel of the driving method of FIG. 10 using the touch panel of the driving method of FIG. 9. As shown in Fig. 11, in order to obtain the same sensitivity as the driving method of Fig. 10 by the driving method of Fig. 9, it is necessary to repeat the driving of the same driving line four times, and to add these results. That is, the driving time of the driving line is four times. Conversely, with the driving method shown in FIG. 10, in order to obtain the same sensitivity as the previous driving method shown in FIG. 9, the driving time of the driving line is shortened to 1/4 of that in the driving mode shown in FIG. Thereby, the power consumption of the touch panel system can be reduced.
圖12係顯示包含此種正交序列驅動方式之觸控面板3之觸控面板系統1c之概略圖。即,圖12之觸控面板系統1c係一般化顯示圖10所示之4根驅動線、及1根感應線。 FIG. 12 is a schematic view showing a touch panel system 1c including the touch panel 3 of such an orthogonal sequence driving method. That is, the touch panel system 1c of FIG. 12 generally displays four drive lines and one sense line as shown in FIG.
具體而言,觸控面板系統1c係在M根驅動線35與L根感應線33(M、L皆為自然數)之間形成有矩陣狀靜電電容。觸控面板系統1c中,對於該等靜電電容矩陣Cij(i=1,...M,j=1,...,L),使用由+1與-1構成之彼此正交之碼長N之碼di=(di1,...,diN)(i=1,...,M),以+1時成為+V伏特,-1 時成為-V伏特之方式並列同時驅動所有M根驅動線35。接著,藉由每根感應線33所讀出之輸出序列sj=(sj1,...,sjN)(j=1,...,L)、與碼di之內積運算di.sj=Σ(k=1,...,N)dik.sjk,來推定電容值Cij。觸控面板系統1c為了進行此種內積運算,而具備電荷積分器47(解碼部)。自電荷積分器47之輸出訊號(Vout)之訊號強度係由Vout=Cf×Vdrive×N/Cint求得。 Specifically, the touch panel system 1c is formed with a matrix capacitance between the M drive lines 35 and the L sense lines 33 (both M and L are natural numbers). In the touch panel system 1c, for the electrostatic capacitance matrices Cij (i = 1, ... M, j = 1, ..., L), code lengths orthogonal to each other composed of +1 and -1 are used. The code of N is di=(di1,...,diN)(i=1,...,M), which becomes +V volt when +1, -1 When the mode becomes -V volts, all the M drive lines 35 are driven in parallel. Then, the output sequence sj=(sj1, . . . , sjN) (j=1, . . . , L) read by each sensing line 33 and the inner product of the code di operate di. Sj=Σ(k=1,...,N)dik. Sjk, to estimate the capacitance value Cij. The touch panel system 1c is provided with a charge integrator 47 (decoding unit) for performing such inner product calculation. The signal strength of the output signal (Vout) from the charge integrator 47 is obtained by Vout = Cf × Vdrive × N / Cint.
輸出序列sj係sj=(sj1,...,sjN)=(Σ(k=1,...,M)Ckj×dk1,...,Σ(k=1,...,M)Ckj×dkN)×(Vdrive/Cint)=(Σ(k=1,...,M)Ckj×(dk1,...,dkN)×(Vdrive/Cint)=Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×dk)×(Vdrive/Cint)。 The output sequence sj is sj=(sj1,...,sjN)=(Σ(k=1,...,M)Ckj×dk1,...,Σ(k=1,...,M)Ckj ×dkN)×(Vdrive/Cint)=(Σ(k=1,...,M)Ckj×(dk1,...,dkN)×(Vdrive/Cint)=Σ(k=1,... , M) (Ckj × dk) × (Vdrive / Cint).
碼di與輸出序列sj之內積係di.sj=di.(Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×dk)×(Vdrive/Cint))=Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×di.dk)×(Vdrive/Cint)=Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×N×δik)×(Vdrive/Cint)[若i=k則δik=1,若i不為1則δik=0]=Cij×N×(Vdrive/Cint)。 The code di is integrated with the output sequence sj. Sj=di. (Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×dk)×(Vdrive/Cint))=Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×di.dk)×(Vdrive/Cint )=Σ(k=1,...,M)(Ckj×N×δik)×(Vdrive/Cint)[if i=k then δik=1, if i is not 1, then δik=0]=Cij× N × (Vdrive / Cint).
如此,若根據觸控面板系統1c,則藉由正交序列驅動方式驅動觸控面板3。因此,藉由算出碼di與輸出序列sj之內積,一般可求得N(碼長)倍之電容Cij訊號。該驅動方式之效果不依存於驅動線35之根數M,且令電容器之訊號強度N倍化。此外,反言之,藉由採用正交序列驅動方式,為 了取得與圖9所示先前之驅動方式同等之感度,驅動線之驅動時間係可縮短至圖9所示驅動方式時之1/N。即,可減少驅動線之驅動次數。從而可降低觸控面板系統1c之電力消耗。 Thus, according to the touch panel system 1c, the touch panel 3 is driven by the orthogonal sequence driving method. Therefore, by calculating the inner product of the code di and the output sequence sj, a capacitance Cij signal of N (code length) times is generally obtained. The effect of the driving method does not depend on the number M of the driving lines 35, and the signal intensity of the capacitor is multiplied by N. In addition, in other words, by using orthogonal sequence driving, The sensitivity equal to that of the previous driving method shown in FIG. 9 is obtained, and the driving time of the driving line can be shortened to 1/N in the driving mode shown in FIG. That is, the number of driving of the drive line can be reduced. Thereby, the power consumption of the touch panel system 1c can be reduced.
[實施形態5] [Embodiment 5]
圖13係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1d之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1d對於附帶如上述圖7所示之雜訊消除功能之觸控面板系統1b,應用如圖10、圖12所示之觸控面板系統1c中驅動線35之正交序列驅動方式者。觸控面板系統1d之動作因與上述觸控面板系統1b、1c相同,故省略說明。 Fig. 13 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1d of the embodiment. The touch panel system 1d applies the orthogonal sequence driving method of the driving line 35 in the touch panel system 1c shown in FIG. 10 and FIG. 12 for the touch panel system 1b with the noise canceling function as shown in FIG. By. Since the operation of the touch panel system 1d is the same as that of the above-described touch panel systems 1b and 1c, description thereof will be omitted.
根據觸控面板系統1d,取得鄰接感應線33間之差分訊號值。即,取得雜訊相關性更高之鄰接感應線33間之差分。再者,從各感應線33之輸出訊號除去副感應線34之訊號(雜訊訊號)。因此,觸控面板系統1d與實施形態1、2之觸控面板系統1、1a相比,可更確實除去雜訊。進而,因求得N(碼長)倍之電容Cij訊號,故,不依存於驅動線35之數量,且令電容器之訊號強度N倍化。此外,藉由採用正交序列驅動方式,為了取得與圖9所示之先前驅動方式同等之感度,驅動線之驅動時間縮短為圖9所示之驅動方式時之1/N。即,可減少驅動線之驅動次數。從而,可降低觸控面板系統1d之電力消耗。 According to the touch panel system 1d, the difference signal value between the adjacent sensing lines 33 is obtained. That is, the difference between the adjacent sensing lines 33 with higher noise correlation is obtained. Furthermore, the signal (noise signal) of the sub-sensing line 34 is removed from the output signal of each sensing line 33. Therefore, the touch panel system 1d can more reliably remove noise than the touch panel systems 1 and 1a of the first and second embodiments. Further, since the capacitance Cij signal of N (code length) is obtained, the number of the drive lines 35 is not dependent, and the signal strength of the capacitor is multiplied by N. Further, by using the orthogonal sequence driving method, in order to obtain the same sensitivity as the previous driving method shown in FIG. 9, the driving time of the driving line is shortened to 1/N in the driving mode shown in FIG. That is, the number of driving of the drive line can be reduced. Thereby, the power consumption of the touch panel system 1d can be reduced.
[實施形態6] [Embodiment 6]
圖14係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1e之基本構成之 概略圖。觸控面板系統1e中,減算部41之構成不同。 Figure 14 is a view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1e of the present embodiment. Schematic diagram. In the touch panel system 1e, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41 is different.
觸控面板3b之自感應線33、副感應線34之輸出訊號係類比訊號。因此,減算部41包含:AD轉換部48(第3 AD轉換部)、及數位減算器(未圖示)。 The output signals of the self-sensing line 33 and the sub-sensing line 34 of the touch panel 3b are analog signals. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41 includes an AD conversion unit 48 (third AD conversion unit) and a digital subtractor (not shown).
藉此,自觸控面板3b之輸出訊號(類比訊號)在減算部41之AD轉換部48中,被轉換成數位訊號。數位減算器係使用經轉換之數位訊號,進行與圖7之觸控面板系統1b相同之減算處理。 Thereby, the output signal (analog signal) from the touch panel 3b is converted into a digital signal by the AD conversion unit 48 of the subtraction unit 41. The digital subtractor performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1b of FIG. 7 using the converted digital signal.
如此,觸控面板系統1e係將自觸控面板3b輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號後,藉由進行減算處理,可消除雜訊。 In this manner, the touch panel system 1e converts the analog signal output from the touch panel 3b into a digital signal, and then performs noise reduction to eliminate noise.
[實施形態7] [Embodiment 7]
圖15係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1f之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1f中,減算部41之構成不同。 Fig. 15 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1f of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1f, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41 is different.
觸控面板3b之自感應線33、副感應線34之輸出訊號係類比訊號。因此,減算部41包含差動放大器49及AD轉換部48。 The output signals of the self-sensing line 33 and the sub-sensing line 34 of the touch panel 3b are analog signals. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41 includes the differential amplifier 49 and the AD conversion unit 48.
藉此,差動放大器49將自觸控面板3b之輸出訊號(類比訊號)直接以類比訊號進行與圖7之觸控面板系統1b相同之減算處理。AD轉換部48(第4 AD轉換部)係將減算處理後之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號。 Thereby, the differential amplifier 49 directly performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1b of FIG. 7 by the analog signal from the output signal (analog signal) of the touch panel 3b. The AD conversion unit 48 (fourth AD conversion unit) converts the analog signal after the subtraction process into a digital signal.
如此,觸控面板系統1f將自觸控面板3b輸出之類比訊號直接以類比訊號進行減算處理後,再轉換成數位訊號,從而可除去雜訊。 In this way, the touch panel system 1f directly subtracts the analog signal outputted from the touch panel 3b with the analog signal, and then converts it into a digital signal, thereby removing the noise.
[實施形態8] [Embodiment 8]
圖16係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1g之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1g中,減算部41之構成不同。觸控面板系統1g係包含全差動放大器50,替代圖15之觸控面板系統1f之差動放大器49。 Fig. 16 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1g of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1g, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41 is different. The touch panel system 1g includes a fully differential amplifier 50 instead of the differential amplifier 49 of the touch panel system 1f of FIG.
觸控面板3b之自感應線33、副感應線34之輸出訊號係類比訊號。故,減算部41包含全差動放大器50及AD轉換部48。 The output signals of the self-sensing line 33 and the sub-sensing line 34 of the touch panel 3b are analog signals. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41 includes the fully differential amplifier 50 and the AD conversion unit 48.
藉此,全差動放大器50將自觸控面板3b之輸出訊號(類比訊號),直接以類比訊號進行與圖7之觸控面板系統1b相同之減算處理。AD轉換部48將減算處理後之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號。 Thereby, the full differential amplifier 50 directly performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1b of FIG. 7 by the analog signal from the output signal (analog signal) of the touch panel 3b. The AD conversion unit 48 converts the analog signal after the subtraction process into a digital signal.
圖17係顯示全差動放大器50之一例之電路圖。全差動放大器50係於差動放大器中對稱配置有2對靜電電容及開關。具體而言,於非反轉輸入端子(+)與反轉輸入端子(-),輸入來自鄰接感應線33之訊號。差動放大器之反轉輸出端子(-)與非反轉輸入端子(+)之間、及差動放大器之非反轉輸出端子(+)與反轉輸入端子(-)之間,連接有相同電容(反饋電容)。再者,反轉輸出端子(-)與非反轉輸入端子(+)之間、及非反轉輸出端子(+)與反轉輸入端子(-)之間分別連接有開關。 Fig. 17 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the fully differential amplifier 50. The fully differential amplifier 50 is symmetrically arranged with two pairs of electrostatic capacitors and switches in the differential amplifier. Specifically, a signal from the adjacent sensing line 33 is input to the non-inverting input terminal (+) and the inverting input terminal (-). The same connection is made between the inverting output terminal (-) of the differential amplifier and the non-inverting input terminal (+), and between the non-inverting output terminal (+) and the inverting input terminal (-) of the differential amplifier. Capacitor (feedback capacitor). Further, a switch is connected between the inverting output terminal (-) and the non-inverting input terminal (+) and between the non-inverting output terminal (+) and the inverting input terminal (-).
如此,觸控面板系統1g係可將自觸控面板3b輸出之類比訊號直接以類比訊號進行減算處理後,再轉換成數位訊號,而除去雜訊。 In this way, the touch panel system 1g can directly reduce the analog signal outputted from the touch panel 3b by analog signals, and then convert the digital signals into digital signals to remove the noise.
[實施形態9] [Embodiment 9]
圖18係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1h之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1h中,減算部41之構成及觸控面板3b之驅動方式不同。觸控面板系統1h包含全差動放大器50,以替代圖15之觸控面板系統1f之差動放大器49。 Fig. 18 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1h of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1h, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41 and the driving method of the touch panel 3b are different. The touch panel system 1h includes a fully differential amplifier 50 in place of the differential amplifier 49 of the touch panel system 1f of FIG.
觸控面板3b之自感應線33、副感應線34之輸出訊號係類比訊號。故,減算部41包含全差動放大器50及AD轉換部48。 The output signals of the self-sensing line 33 and the sub-sensing line 34 of the touch panel 3b are analog signals. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41 includes the fully differential amplifier 50 and the AD conversion unit 48.
藉此,全差動放大器50將自觸控面板3b之輸出訊號(類比訊號),直接以類比訊號進行與圖7之觸控面板系統1b相同之減算處理。AD轉換部48將減算處理後之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號。 Thereby, the full differential amplifier 50 directly performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1b of FIG. 7 by the analog signal from the output signal (analog signal) of the touch panel 3b. The AD conversion unit 48 converts the analog signal after the subtraction process into a digital signal.
再者,觸控面板系統1h中,作為觸控面板3b之驅動方式,係使用圖10、圖12、圖13所示之正交序列驅動方式。該情形下,如圖10所示,驅動4根驅動線之電壓,在第2次~第4次之情形中,+V被施加之次數與-V被施加之次數同為2次,相對於此,在第1次之情形中,+V被施加了4次。因此,第1次輸出序列Y1之輸出值與第2~4次之輸出序列Y2~Y4之輸出值相比變大。因此,若對第2~4次之輸出序列Y2~Y4之輸出值匹配動態範圍,則第1次之輸出序列Y1呈飽和。 Further, in the touch panel system 1h, as the driving method of the touch panel 3b, the orthogonal sequence driving method shown in FIGS. 10, 12, and 13 is used. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10, the voltages of the four driving lines are driven, and in the case of the second to fourth times, the number of times +V is applied is the same as the number of times -V is applied twice, as opposed to Thus, in the first case, +V was applied 4 times. Therefore, the output value of the first output sequence Y1 becomes larger than the output value of the output sequences Y2 to Y4 of the second to fourth times. Therefore, if the output values of the output sequences Y2 to Y4 of the second to fourth times match the dynamic range, the output sequence Y1 of the first time is saturated.
因此,觸控面板系統1h之減算部41包含全差動放大器50。再者,全差動放大器50係採用輸入共模電壓範圍係進行軌對軌動作者。即,該全差動放大器50之共模輸入範圍較廣。藉此,全差動放大器50可在電源電壓(Vdd)至GND 之電壓範圍內動作。且對輸入至全差動放大器50之輸入訊號之差分進行放大。從而,無論組合何種正交序列驅動方式之觸控面板3b,自全差動放大器50之輸出訊號亦不會產生輸出飽和問題。另,全差動放大器50之一例係如上述圖17所示。 Therefore, the subtraction unit 41 of the touch panel system 1h includes the fully differential amplifier 50. Furthermore, the fully differential amplifier 50 employs an input common mode voltage range for rail-to-rail actor. That is, the full differential amplifier 50 has a wide common mode input range. Thereby, the fully differential amplifier 50 can be connected to the power supply voltage (Vdd) to GND. Operates within the voltage range. And the difference between the input signals input to the fully differential amplifier 50 is amplified. Therefore, regardless of the combination of the orthogonal sequence driving method of the touch panel 3b, the output signal from the fully differential amplifier 50 does not cause an output saturation problem. In addition, an example of the fully differential amplifier 50 is as shown in FIG. 17 described above.
如此,觸控面板系統1h可將自觸控面板3b輸出之類比訊號直接以類比訊號進行減算處理後,轉換成數位訊號,而除去雜訊。再者,由於包含可進行軌對軌(rail to rail)動作之全差動放大器50,故,自全差動放大器50之輸出訊號不會產生輸出飽和問題。 In this way, the touch panel system 1h can directly reduce the analog signal outputted from the touch panel 3b by analog signals, convert the digital signals into digital signals, and remove the noise. Furthermore, since the fully differential amplifier 50, which can perform a rail-to-rail operation, does not cause an output saturation problem from the output signal of the fully differential amplifier 50.
[實施形態10] [Embodiment 10]
實施形態1~9中,對包含副感應器32(副感應線34)之觸控面板系統加以說明。但,本發明之觸控面板系統中,副感應器32並非必須之構成。本實施形態係針對未包含副感應器32之觸控面板系統加以說明。 In the first to ninth embodiments, the touch panel system including the sub sensor 32 (the sub sensor line 34) will be described. However, in the touch panel system of the present invention, the sub sensor 32 is not necessarily configured. This embodiment describes a touch panel system that does not include the sub sensor 32.
圖20係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1i之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1i包含減算部41a,用以算出彼此鄰接之感應線33之差分訊號。 Fig. 20 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1i of the embodiment. The touch panel system 1i includes a subtraction unit 41a for calculating differential signals of the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other.
更具體而言,觸控面板3c包含複數根(圖20中為5根)驅動線35、及與各驅動線35交叉之複數根(圖20中為8根)感應線33。感應線33與驅動線35係彼此分別絕緣,且電容耦合。 More specifically, the touch panel 3c includes a plurality of (five in FIG. 20) driving lines 35 and a plurality of (eight in FIG. 20) sensing lines 33 crossing the respective driving lines 35. The sensing line 33 and the driving line 35 are insulated from each other and capacitively coupled.
觸控面板控制器4從輸入側開始,依序包含:開關SW、減算部41a、及儲存部45a~45d。另,雖然未圖示,但觸控面板控制器4亦包含座標檢測部42及CPU43(參照圖1)。 The touch panel controller 4 includes, from the input side, a switch SW, a subtraction unit 41a, and storage units 45a to 45d. Further, although not shown, the touch panel controller 4 also includes a coordinate detecting unit 42 and a CPU 43 (see FIG. 1).
減算部41a包含輸入端子(主感應器輸出用之輸入端子),用以接收自主感應器31輸出之訊號。減算部41a係接收自主感應器31之訊號,且對彼此鄰接之感應線33之訊號進行減算,並算出差分值(差分訊號)。由減算部41a減算處理後之訊號輸出至座標檢測部42(參照圖1)。 The subtraction unit 41a includes an input terminal (an input terminal for main inductor output) for receiving a signal output from the autonomous sensor 31. The subtraction unit 41a receives the signal of the autonomous sensor 31, and subtracts the signals of the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other, and calculates a difference value (differential signal). The signal subtracted by the subtraction unit 41a is output to the coordinate detecting unit 42 (see Fig. 1).
如此,觸控面板系統1i之差異在於不包含副感應器32(副感應線34),且減算部41a之處理亦與上述實施形態之觸控面板系統不同。 As described above, the touch panel system 1i differs in that the sub sensor 32 (sub sensor line 34) is not included, and the processing of the subtraction unit 41a is different from that of the touch panel system of the above embodiment.
開關SW係對自感應線33輸入至減算部41a之訊號進行切換。更詳細而言,開關SW包含上下2個端子,且選擇其中一個端子。圖20為開關SW選擇下側端子之狀態。 The switch SW switches the signal input from the sensing line 33 to the subtraction unit 41a. In more detail, the switch SW includes two upper and lower terminals, and one of the terminals is selected. Fig. 20 shows a state in which the switch SW selects the lower terminal.
減算部41a係進行由開關SW選擇之排列(1)~(8)之訊號之差分訊號處理。即,減算部41a進行鄰接之感應線33間之差分訊號處理。例如如圖20所示,在開關SW選擇下側端子之情形,減算部41a進行排列(8)-排列(7)、排列(6)-排列(5)、排列(4)-排列(3)、及排列(2)-排列(1)之各差分訊號處理。另一方面,雖然未圖示,但在開關SW選擇上側端子之情形,減算部41a進行排列(7)-排列(6)、排列(5)-排列(4)、及排列(3)-排列(2)之各差分訊號處理。 The subtraction unit 41a performs differential signal processing of the signals of the arrays (1) to (8) selected by the switch SW. In other words, the subtraction unit 41a performs differential signal processing between the adjacent sensing lines 33. For example, as shown in FIG. 20, in the case where the switch SW selects the lower terminal, the subtraction unit 41a performs arrangement (8)-arrangement (7), arrangement (6)-arrangement (5), arrangement (4)-arrangement (3). And sorting (2)-arrangement (1) for each differential signal processing. On the other hand, although not shown, in the case where the switch SW selects the upper terminal, the subtraction unit 41a performs the arrangement of (7)-arrangement (6), arrangement (5)-arrangement (4), and arrangement (3)-arrangement. (2) Each differential signal processing.
儲存部45a~45d儲存在開關SW選擇一端子時之經減算部41a進行差分處理後之訊號(差分處理訊號)。另,在開關SW選擇另一端子時,差分處理訊號未經由儲存部45a~45d而直接輸出。 The storage units 45a to 45d store signals (differential processing signals) subjected to the difference processing by the subtraction unit 41a when the switch SW selects one terminal. Further, when the switch SW selects the other terminal, the differential processing signal is directly outputted without passing through the storage sections 45a to 45d.
(2)觸控面板系統1i之雜訊處理 (2) Noise processing of touch panel system 1i
基於圖20及圖21,對觸控面板系統1i之雜訊處理加以說明。圖21係顯示觸控面板系統1i之基本處理即雜訊消除處理之流程圖。 The noise processing of the touch panel system 1i will be described based on FIGS. 20 and 21. 21 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system 1i, that is, the noise canceling processing.
啟動觸控面板系統1i時,以特定週期對驅動線35施加電位。使用者對觸控面板3c進行觸控操作時,觸控位置所對應之特定感應線33的電容發生變化。即,自該感應線33之輸出訊號值發生變化。觸控面板系統1i係一邊驅動各驅動線35,一邊將自感應線33之輸出訊號輸出至觸控面板控制器4。藉此,觸控面板系統1i一邊驅動驅動線35,一邊檢測感應線33之電容變化,且檢測觸控操作之有無及觸控位置。 When the touch panel system 1i is activated, a potential is applied to the drive line 35 at a specific cycle. When the user performs a touch operation on the touch panel 3c, the capacitance of the specific sensing line 33 corresponding to the touch position changes. That is, the output signal value from the sensing line 33 changes. The touch panel system 1i outputs the output signals of the self-sensing line 33 to the touch panel controller 4 while driving the respective driving lines 35. Thereby, the touch panel system 1i detects the change in the capacitance of the sensing line 33 while driving the driving line 35, and detects the presence or absence of the touch operation and the touch position.
更詳細而言,顯示裝置2產生之時脈等雜訊、及其他外來雜訊係反映於觸控面板3c上。因此,在主感應器群31b中,檢測各種雜訊成分。即,自感應線33之輸出訊號係對觸控操作原本之訊號加算雜訊訊號(雜訊成分)(F701)。繼而,開關SW選擇下側端子(F702)。接著,減算部41a中取得感應線33(感應線Sn)、與鄰接於該感應線33之2根感應線33中一感應線(感應線Sn+1)間的差分(感應線(Sn+1)-Sn:第1差分)(F703)。 More specifically, noise such as a clock generated by the display device 2 and other external noise are reflected on the touch panel 3c. Therefore, various noise components are detected in the main sensor group 31b. That is, the output signal of the self-sensing line 33 adds a noise signal (noise component) to the original signal of the touch operation (F701). Then, the switch SW selects the lower terminal (F702). Next, the subtraction unit 41a obtains a difference between the sensing line 33 (sensing line Sn) and one of the two sensing lines 33 adjacent to the sensing line 33 (sensing line Sn+1) (sensing line (Sn+1) )-Sn: first difference) (F703).
在圖20之排列(1)~(8)時,減算部41a進行 In the arrangement (1) to (8) of Fig. 20, the subtraction unit 41a performs
.排列(2)-排列(1)(將該差分值作為A) . Arrange (2) - Arrange (1) (take the difference value as A)
.排列(4)-排列(3)(將該差分值作為C) . Arrange (4) - Arrange (3) (take the difference value as C)
.排列(6)-排列(5)(將該差分值作為E) . Arrange (6)-arrange (5) (take the difference value as E)
.排列(8)-排列(7)(將該差分值作為G)之4種差分訊號處 理。即,在步驟F703中,進行感應線33之排列(1)~(8)之差分訊號處理。 . Four kinds of differential signals at the (8)-arrangement (7) (the difference value is taken as G) Reason. That is, in step F703, the differential signal processing of the arrays (1) to (8) of the sensing lines 33 is performed.
由減算部41a算出之差分值A、C、E、G係儲存於儲存部45a~45d。即,分別係儲存部45a儲存差分值A,儲存部45b儲存差分值C,儲存部45c儲存差分值E,儲存部45d儲存差分值G(F704)。 The difference values A, C, E, and G calculated by the subtraction unit 41a are stored in the storage units 45a to 45d. That is, the storage unit 45a stores the difference value A, the storage unit 45b stores the difference value C, the storage unit 45c stores the difference value E, and the storage unit 45d stores the difference value G (F704).
繼而,將選擇下側端子之開關SW切換成選擇上側端子(關閉)(F705)。接著,在減算部41a中,進行與F703相同之處理。即,進行感應線33(感應線Sn)、與鄰接於該感應線33之2根感應線33中另一感應線(感應線Sn-1)間之差分訊號處理((感應線Sn-(Sn-1)):第2差分)(F706)。 Then, the switch SW that selects the lower terminal is switched to select the upper terminal (closed) (F705). Next, in the subtraction unit 41a, the same processing as F703 is performed. That is, the differential signal processing between the sensing line 33 (inductive line Sn) and the other of the two sensing lines 33 adjacent to the sensing line 33 (sensing line Sn-1) is performed ((sensing line Sn-(Sn) -1)): 2nd difference) (F706).
在圖20之排列(1)~(8)時,減算部41a進行 In the arrangement (1) to (8) of Fig. 20, the subtraction unit 41a performs
.排列(3)-排列(2)(將該差分值作為B) . Arrange (3) - Arrange (2) (take the difference value as B)
.排列(5)-排列(4)(將該差分值作為D) . Arrange (5) - Arrange (4) (take the difference value as D)
.排列(7)-排列(6)(將該差分值作為F)之3種差分訊號處理。即,在步驟F706中,進行排列(2)~(7)之差分訊號處理。 . Three kinds of differential signals are processed (7)-arranged (6) (the difference value is taken as F). That is, in step F706, the differential signal processing of the arrays (2) to (7) is performed.
如上所述,觸控面板系統1i取得鄰接之感應線33間之差分訊號值。即,取得雜訊相關性更高之鄰接感應線33間之差分。即,從主感應器群31a之輸出訊號中除去雜訊成分,且擷取觸控操作原本之訊號。從而,可更確實除去(消除)於觸控面板3c反映之多種類雜訊。 As described above, the touch panel system 1i obtains the difference signal value between the adjacent sensing lines 33. That is, the difference between the adjacent sensing lines 33 with higher noise correlation is obtained. That is, the noise component is removed from the output signal of the main sensor group 31a, and the original signal of the touch operation is extracted. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably remove (eliminate) various types of noise reflected by the touch panel 3c.
[實施形態11] [Embodiment 11]
圖22係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1j之基本構成之 概略圖。觸控面板系統1j對於附帶如上述圖20所示之雜訊消除功能之觸控面板系統1i,係應用並列驅動驅動線35之驅動線驅動電路(未圖示)者。再者,觸控面板系統1j包含:解碼部58,其將由減算部41a算出之靜電電容之差分值解碼化;非觸控操作時資訊記憶部61,其記憶在非觸控操作時由解碼部58解碼化之靜電電容之差分分布;及校正部62,其校正在觸控操作時由解碼部58解碼化之靜電電容之差分分布。觸控面板系統1j之動作因與上述觸控面板1i相同,故省略說明。因此,以下以減算部41a、解碼部58、非觸控操作時資訊記憶部61、及校正部62之處理為中心加以說明。又,下文中,作為用以並列驅動之碼列,使用正交序列或M序列為例加以說明。 Figure 22 is a diagram showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1j of the present embodiment. Schematic diagram. The touch panel system 1j applies a drive line drive circuit (not shown) that drives the drive line 35 in parallel with the touch panel system 1i with the noise canceling function shown in FIG. 20 described above. Further, the touch panel system 1j includes a decoding unit 58 that decodes a difference value of the capacitance calculated by the subtraction unit 41a, and a non-touch operation information storage unit 61 that is stored in the non-touch operation by the decoding unit. a differential distribution of the decoded electrostatic capacitances; and a correction unit 62 that corrects a differential distribution of the electrostatic capacitances decoded by the decoding unit 58 during the touch operation. Since the operation of the touch panel system 1j is the same as that of the above-described touch panel 1i, description thereof will be omitted. Therefore, the following description will focus on the processing of the subtraction unit 41a, the decoding unit 58, the non-touch operation information storage unit 61, and the correction unit 62. Further, hereinafter, an orthogonal sequence or an M sequence will be described as an example of a code sequence for parallel driving.
具體而言,並行驅動第1至第N根驅動線之碼序列(成分係1或-1)為:d1=(d11,d12,...,d1N) Specifically, the code sequence (component system 1 or -1) of driving the first to Nth drive lines in parallel is: d 1 = (d 11 , d 12 , ..., d 1N )
d2=(d21,d22,...,d2N) d 2 = (d 21 , d 22 ,...,d 2N )
. .
. .
. .
dM=(dM1,dM2,...,dMN),將下述該序列轉換為正交序列或碼長N(=2n-1)之M序列。此種序列具有下述式成立之性質。 d M = (d M1 , d M2 , ..., d MN ), and the following sequence is converted into an M sequence of an orthogonal sequence or a code length N (= 2 n -1). Such a sequence has the property that the following formula holds.
[數1]
此處,d1~dM為正交序列時、若i=j則δij=1,若i≠j則δij=0 Here, when d 1 ~d M are orthogonal sequences, δ ij =1 if i=j, δ ij =0 if i≠j
d1~dM為M序列時、若i=j則δij=1,若i≠j則δij=-1/N When d 1 ~d M is the M sequence, if i=j then δ ij =1, if i≠j then δ ij =-1/N
將該序列所對應之感應線33之差分輸出序列「Sj,P(j=1,...,[L/2],P=1,2)(L係感應線33之數、[n]=n之整數部分)」定義為Sj,1:開關SW於下側時之與d1~dM對應之輸出序列 The differential output sequence of the sensing line 33 corresponding to the sequence is "S j, P (j = 1, ..., [L/2], P = 1, 2) (the number of the L-shaped sensing lines 33, [n] ] = the integer part of n) is defined as S j,1 : the output sequence corresponding to d 1 ~d M when the switch SW is on the lower side
Sj,2:開關SW於上側時之與d1~dM對應之輸出序列 S j,2 : output sequence corresponding to d 1 ~d M when the switch SW is on the upper side
此外,將感應線33方向之電容值之差分分布「(sC)kj,P(k=1,...,M,j=1,...,[L/2],P=1,2)」定義為(sC)kj,1=Ck,2j-Ck,2j-1 In addition, the difference distribution of the capacitance values in the direction of the sensing line 33 "( sC) kj,P (k=1,...,M,j=1,...,[L/2],P=1,2)” is defined as ( sC) kj,1 =C k,2j -C k,2j-1
(sC)kj,2=Ck,2j+1-Ck,2j ( sC) kj,2 =C k,2j+1 -C k,2j
該情形時,並列驅動產生之電容之感應線方向之差分輸出係如下述式所示。 In this case, the differential output of the sense line direction of the capacitance generated by the parallel drive is as shown in the following equation.
解碼部58係對由減算部41a算出之靜電電容之差分值(即,感應線33方向之電容值之差分分布)進行解碼。具體 而言,對並行驅動感應線33之碼序列、與感應線33方向之電容值之差分分布之內積進行運算。從而,經解碼部58解碼後之內積值係如下式所示。 The decoding unit 58 decodes the difference value of the capacitance calculated by the subtraction unit 41a (that is, the difference distribution of the capacitance values in the direction of the sensing line 33). specific In other words, the inner product of the difference between the code sequence of the parallel drive sense line 33 and the capacitance value of the sense line 33 direction is calculated. Therefore, the inner product value decoded by the decoding unit 58 is as shown in the following equation.
此處, Here,
d1~dM為正交序列時、若i=j則δij=1,若i≠j則δij=0 When d 1 ~d M is an orthogonal sequence, if i=j then δ ij =1, if i≠j then δ ij =0
d1~dM為正交序列時、若i=j則δij=1,若i≠j則δij=-1/N When d 1 ~d M is an orthogonal sequence, if i=j then δ ij =1, if i≠j then δ ij =-1/N
如此,解碼部58中,作為解碼後之內積值di.Sj,P之主成分,算出經N倍化之感應線33方向之電容值之差分分布(sC)kj,P。因此,藉由將內積值di.sj,P作為感應線33方向之電容值之差分分布(sC)ij,P之推定值,可讀出該電容值之訊號強度經N倍(碼長倍)化。 In this way, the decoding unit 58 serves as the inner product value d i after decoding. S j, the main component of P , calculates the difference distribution of the capacitance values in the direction of the N-folded sensing line 33 ( sC) kj,P . Therefore, by the inner product value d i . s j,P as the differential distribution of the capacitance values in the direction of the sensing line 33 ( sC) ij, the estimated value of P , the signal intensity of the capacitor value can be read by N times (code length).
另一方面,如上所述,藉由定義感應線33之差分輸出序列Sj,P(P=1,2),可消除鄰接感應線33上共通重疊之共模雜訊。從而,可讀出SNR較高之差分電容。 On the other hand, as described above, by defining the differential output sequence S j,P (P = 1, 2) of the sensing line 33, the common mode noise overlapping on the adjacent sensing line 33 can be eliminated. Thereby, the differential capacitance with a higher SNR can be read.
如上所述,根據觸控面板系統1j並列驅動觸控面板3c,解碼部58對由減算部41a算出之靜電電容之差分值進行解碼。藉此,由於求得靜電電容訊號經碼長倍(N倍)化,故不依存驅動線35之數量,亦可提高靜電電容之訊號強度。 此外,若為與圖9所示之先前驅動方式相同之訊號強度,則驅動線35之驅動時間可縮短為圖9所示驅動方式時之1/N。即,可減少驅動線35之驅動次數。從而可降低觸控面板系統1j之電力消耗。 As described above, the touch panel 3c drives the touch panel 3c in parallel, and the decoding unit 58 decodes the difference value of the capacitance calculated by the subtraction unit 41a. Therefore, since the electrostatic capacitance signal is obtained by the code length multiplication (N times), the signal strength of the electrostatic capacitance can be increased without depending on the number of the driving lines 35. Further, if it is the same signal intensity as the previous driving method shown in FIG. 9, the driving time of the driving line 35 can be shortened to 1/N in the driving mode shown in FIG. That is, the number of driving of the drive line 35 can be reduced. Thereby, the power consumption of the touch panel system 1j can be reduced.
又,觸控面板系統1j中,校正部62較好自觸控操作時算出之彼此鄰接之感應線33之差分(即,觸控面板3c整體之差分值分布),減去非觸控操作時算出之彼此鄰接之感應線33之差分(=觸控操作整體之差分值分布)。即,較好在觸控操作前後進行如上所述之差分訊號處理,且對觸控操作前後之差分值訊號進行減算。例如,將無觸控操作之初期狀態(非觸控操作時)之差分分布(sC)kj,P之推定值記憶於非觸控操作時資訊記憶部61中。接著,校正部62從觸控操作時之差分分布(sC)kj之推定值,減去記憶於非觸控操作時資訊記憶部61之非觸控操作時之差分分布(sC)kj,P之推定值。藉此,校正部62從觸控操作時之靜電電容之差分分布,減去記憶於非觸控操作時資訊記憶部61之非觸控操作時之靜電電容之差分分布(觸控操作時之差分值訊號-非觸控操作時之差分值訊號)。從而,可消除觸控面板3c內在之偏差。 Moreover, in the touch panel system 1j, the correction unit 62 preferably has a difference between the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other calculated from the touch operation (that is, the difference value distribution of the touch panel 3c as a whole), and subtracts the non-touch operation. The difference between the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other is calculated (= the difference value distribution of the entire touch operation). That is, it is preferable to perform the differential signal processing as described above before and after the touch operation, and to reduce the difference value signal before and after the touch operation. For example, the differential distribution of the initial state of the touchless operation (when not touched) sC) kj, the estimated value of P is stored in the non-touch operation information memory unit 61. Then, the correction unit 62 is differentially distributed from the touch operation ( sC) the estimated value of kj minus the difference distribution when the non-touch operation of the information storage unit 61 is stored in the non-touch operation ( sC) kj , the estimated value of P. Therefore, the correction unit 62 subtracts the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the non-touch operation of the information storage unit 61 during the non-touch operation from the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance during the touch operation (the difference in the touch operation) Value signal - the differential value signal for non-touch operation). Thereby, the inherent deviation of the touch panel 3c can be eliminated.
藉此,觸控面板系統1j中,消除了由觸控面板3c內在之電容差異所造成之差成分,且僅檢測觸控操作引起之差成分。於M序列之情形時,混入有於正交序列無法帶入之誤差成分(若非i≠j,則δij=-1/N)。但,由於該誤差成分係僅由觸控操作所引起,故若以N=63或127之方式放大N,則 SNR之劣化較少。 Thereby, in the touch panel system 1j, the difference component caused by the difference in capacitance inherent in the touch panel 3c is eliminated, and only the difference component caused by the touch operation is detected. In the case of the M sequence, there is an error component that cannot be carried in the orthogonal sequence (if not i≠j, δ ij =-1/N). However, since the error component is caused only by the touch operation, if N is amplified by N=63 or 127, the degradation of SNR is small.
[實施形態12] [Embodiment 12]
圖23係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1k之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1k中,減算部41a之構成不同。 Fig. 23 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1k of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1k, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41a is different.
觸控面板3c之自感應線33之輸出訊號係類比訊號。因此,減算部41a包含:AD轉換部48a(第1 AD轉換部)及數位減算器(未圖示)。 The output signal of the self-sensing line 33 of the touch panel 3c is analogous to the signal. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41a includes an AD conversion unit 48a (first AD conversion unit) and a digital subtractor (not shown).
藉此,自觸控面板3c之輸出訊號(類比訊號)在減算部41a之AD轉換部48a中,被轉換成數位訊號。數位減算器使用轉換後之數位訊號,進行與圖20之觸控面板系統1i、1j相同之減算處理。 Thereby, the output signal (analog signal) from the touch panel 3c is converted into a digital signal by the AD conversion unit 48a of the subtraction unit 41a. The digital subtractor performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel systems 1i, 1j of FIG. 20 using the converted digital signal.
如此,觸控面板系統1k係可藉由將自觸控面板3c輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號後,進行減算處理,藉此除去雜訊。 In this manner, the touch panel system 1k can perform the subtraction process by converting the analog signal output from the touch panel 3c into a digital signal, thereby removing noise.
[實施形態13] [Embodiment 13]
圖24係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1m之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1m中,減算部41a之構成不同。 Fig. 24 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1m of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1m, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41a is different.
觸控面板3c之自感應線33之輸出訊號係類比訊號。因此,減算部41a包含:差動放大器49及AD轉換部48a(第2 AD轉換部)。 The output signal of the self-sensing line 33 of the touch panel 3c is analogous to the signal. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41a includes the differential amplifier 49 and the AD conversion unit 48a (second AD conversion unit).
藉此,差動放大器49係將自觸控面板3c之輸出訊號(類比訊號)直接以類比訊號進行與圖20之觸控面板系統1i相同之減算處理。AD轉換部48a將減算處理後之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號。 Thereby, the differential amplifier 49 directly performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1i of FIG. 20 by using the analog signal from the output signal (analog signal) of the touch panel 3c. The AD conversion unit 48a converts the analog signal after the subtraction process into a digital signal.
如此,觸控面板系統1m可藉由對由觸控面板3c輸出之類比訊號直接以類比訊號進行減算處理後,再轉換成數位訊號,而除去雜訊。 In this way, the touch panel system 1m can be directly converted into a digital signal by subtracting the analog signal from the analog signal outputted by the touch panel 3c, and then removing the noise.
[實施形態14] [Embodiment 14]
圖25係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1n之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1n中,減算部41a之構成不同。觸控面板系統1n包含全差動放大器50替代圖24之觸控面板系統1m之差動放大器49。 Fig. 25 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1n of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1n, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41a is different. The touch panel system 1n includes a fully differential amplifier 50 in place of the differential amplifier 49 of the touch panel system 1m of FIG.
觸控面板3c之自感應線33之輸出訊號係類比訊號。因此,減算部41a包含:全差動放大器50及AD轉換部48a。 The output signal of the self-sensing line 33 of the touch panel 3c is analogous to the signal. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41a includes the fully differential amplifier 50 and the AD conversion unit 48a.
藉此,全差動放大器50對自觸控面板3c之輸出訊號(類比訊號)直接以類比訊號進行與圖20之觸控面板系統1i相同之減算處理。AD轉換部48a將減算處理後之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號。 Thereby, the full differential amplifier 50 performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1i of FIG. 20 directly with the analog signal from the output signal (analog signal) of the touch panel 3c. The AD conversion unit 48a converts the analog signal after the subtraction process into a digital signal.
如此,觸控面板系統1n可藉由對自觸控面板3c輸出之類比訊號直接以類比訊號進行減算處理後,再轉換成數位訊號,而除去雜訊。 In this way, the touch panel system 1n can directly reduce the analog signal by the analog signal output from the touch panel 3c, and then convert the digital signal into a digital signal to remove the noise.
[實施形態15] [Embodiment 15]
圖26係顯示本實施形態之觸控面板系統1o之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1o中,減算部41a之構成不同。觸控面板系統1o包含全差動放大器50而替代圖24之觸控面板系統1m之差動放大器49。 Fig. 26 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of the touch panel system 1o of the embodiment. In the touch panel system 1o, the configuration of the subtraction unit 41a is different. The touch panel system 1o includes a fully differential amplifier 50 instead of the differential amplifier 49 of the touch panel system 1m of FIG.
觸控面板3c之自感應線33之輸出訊號係類比訊號。因此,減算部41a包含:全差動放大器50及AD轉換部48a。 The output signal of the self-sensing line 33 of the touch panel 3c is analogous to the signal. Therefore, the subtraction unit 41a includes the fully differential amplifier 50 and the AD conversion unit 48a.
藉此,全差動放大器50係對自觸控面板3c之輸出訊號(類比訊號)直接以類比訊號進行與圖20之觸控面板系統1i相同之減算處理。AD轉換部48a將減算處理後之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號。 Thereby, the fully differential amplifier 50 directly performs the same subtraction processing as the touch panel system 1i of FIG. 20 with the analog signal directly from the output signal (analog signal) of the touch panel 3c. The AD conversion unit 48a converts the analog signal after the subtraction process into a digital signal.
再者,觸控面板系統1o中,作為觸控面板3c之驅動方式,係應用圖10、圖12、圖22所示之正交序列驅動方式。該情形下,如圖10所示,驅動4根驅動線之電壓在第2次~第4次之情形中,+V被施加之次數與-V被施加之次數同為2次,相對地,在第1次之情形中,+V被施加了4次。因此,第1次輸出序列Y1之輸出值比第2~4次之輸出序列Y2~Y4之輸出值要大。因此,若對第2~4次之輸出序列Y2~Y4之輸出值配合動態範圍,則第1次之輸出序列Y1成為飽和。 Further, in the touch panel system 1o, as the driving method of the touch panel 3c, the orthogonal sequence driving method shown in FIGS. 10, 12, and 22 is applied. In this case, as shown in FIG. 10, in the case of driving the voltages of the four driving lines in the second to fourth times, the number of times +V is applied is the same as the number of times -V is applied, and vice versa. In the first case, +V was applied 4 times. Therefore, the output value of the first output sequence Y1 is larger than the output values of the output sequences Y2 to Y4 of the second to fourth times. Therefore, if the output values of the output sequences Y2 to Y4 of the second to fourth times match the dynamic range, the output sequence Y1 of the first time becomes saturated.
因此,觸控面板系統1o之減算部41a包含全差動放大器50。 Therefore, the subtraction unit 41a of the touch panel system 1o includes the fully differential amplifier 50.
再者,全差動放大器50係採用輸入共模電壓範圍係進行軌對軌動作者。即,該全差動放大器50係擴大了共模之輸入範圍。藉此,全差動放大器50在電源電壓(Vdd)至GND之電壓範圍內可進行動作。此外,對全差動放大器50之輸入訊號差分進行放大。從而,無論組合何種正交序列驅動方式之觸控面板3c,自全差動放大器50之輸出訊號亦不會產生輸出飽和問題。另,全差動放大器50之一例係如上述圖17所示。 Furthermore, the fully differential amplifier 50 employs an input common mode voltage range for rail-to-rail actor. That is, the fully differential amplifier 50 expands the input range of the common mode. Thereby, the fully differential amplifier 50 can operate in the voltage range of the power supply voltage (Vdd) to GND. In addition, the input signal differential of the fully differential amplifier 50 is amplified. Therefore, regardless of the combination of the orthogonal sequence driving method of the touch panel 3c, the output signal from the fully differential amplifier 50 does not cause an output saturation problem. In addition, an example of the fully differential amplifier 50 is as shown in FIG. 17 described above.
如此,觸控面板系統1o可將自觸控面板3c輸出之類比訊 號直接以類比訊號進行減算處理後,轉換成數位訊號,而除去雜訊。再者,由於包含可進行軌對軌(rail to rail)動作之全差動放大器50,故,自全差動放大器50之輸出訊號不會產生輸出飽和問題。 In this way, the touch panel system 1o can output the analog signal from the touch panel 3c. The number is directly subtracted by the analog signal, converted into a digital signal, and the noise is removed. Furthermore, since the fully differential amplifier 50, which can perform a rail-to-rail operation, does not cause an output saturation problem from the output signal of the fully differential amplifier 50.
[實施形態16] [Embodiment 16]
繼而,對上述實施形態之觸控面板系統之觸控操作之辨識方法加以說明。以下,雖以圖22之觸控面板系統1j為例加以說明,但其他實施形態之觸控面板系統亦相同。觸控面板系統1j包含判定部59(觸控檢測部),其基於由減算部41a及解碼部58算出之彼此鄰接之感應線33的訊號差分、與正及負之臨限值之比較,來判定觸控操作之有無。另,判定部59中,輸入有經校正部62校正處理後之訊號(靜電電容之差分分布)、或未經校正部62校正處理之訊號(靜電電容之差分分布)。將未經校正部62校正處理之訊號輸入至判定部59時,由解碼部58解碼化後之靜電電容之差分分布係直接輸入判定部59。以下,對將未經過校正部62校正處理之訊號輸入判定部59之情形加以說明。然而,將經校正處理之訊號輸入判定部59之情形亦相同。 Then, the method of identifying the touch operation of the touch panel system of the above embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, the touch panel system 1j of FIG. 22 will be described as an example, but the touch panel system of other embodiments is also the same. The touch panel system 1j includes a determination unit 59 (touch detection unit) that compares the signal difference between the adjacent sensing lines 33 calculated by the subtraction unit 41a and the decoding unit 58 with the positive and negative threshold values. Determine the presence or absence of touch operations. Further, the determination unit 59 receives a signal (a difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance) corrected by the correction unit 62 or a signal (a differential distribution of the electrostatic capacitance) corrected by the uncorrected unit 62. When the signal of the correction processing by the uncorrection unit 62 is input to the determination unit 59, the difference distribution of the capacitances decoded by the decoding unit 58 is directly input to the determination unit 59. Hereinafter, a case where the signal that has not been subjected to the correction processing by the correction unit 62 is input to the determination unit 59 will be described. However, the same applies to the case where the signal subjected to the correction processing is input to the determining unit 59.
圖27係顯示圖22之觸控面板系統1j之判定部59之基本處理之流程圖。圖28係顯示圖27之流程圖中觸控資訊辨識方法之模式圖。 Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the judging section 59 of the touch panel system 1j of Fig. 22. 28 is a schematic diagram showing a touch information identification method in the flowchart of FIG. 27.
如圖27所示,判定部59首先取得由減算部41a及解碼部59算出之彼此鄰接之或應線訊號之差分值(差分分布)「(sC)ij,P」(F801)。其次,將該差分值與儲存在判定部 59中之正的臨限值THp及負的臨限值THm作比較,作成增減表(F802)。該增減表係例如圖28之(a)所示,為3值化增減表。 As shown in FIG. 27, the determination unit 59 first acquires the difference value (difference distribution) of the adjacent or lined signals calculated by the subtraction unit 41a and the decoding unit 59. sC) ij,P ” (F801). Next, the difference value is compared with the positive threshold THp and the negative threshold THm stored in the determination unit 59 to create an increase/decrease table (F802). This increase/decrease table is, for example, as shown in (a) of FIG. 28, and is a ternary increase/decrease table.
繼而,將3值化增減表轉換成2值圖像(2值化)(F803)。例如,圖28(a)之增減表中,按感應線S1~感應線S7之順序(圖中向右)進行掃描時,將增減表中出現「+」開始,直至下一個「-」出現為止之所有內容轉換成「1」,且從出現「-」開始,將與掃描方向相反方向(圖中向左)之所有內容轉換成「1」。藉此,取得如圖28(b)所示之2值化資料。 Then, the ternary increase and decrease table is converted into a binary image (binarization) (F803). For example, in the increase/decrease table of Fig. 28(a), when scanning is performed in the order of the sensing line S1 to the sensing line S7 (to the right in the figure), "+" appears in the increase and decrease table until the next "-" Everything that appears until it is converted to "1", and from the occurrence of "-", all contents in the opposite direction to the scanning direction (to the left in the figure) are converted to "1". Thereby, the binarized data as shown in FIG. 28(b) is obtained.
接著,為從2值化資料中擷取觸控資訊,而擷取連結成分(F804)。例如,圖28(b)中,鄰接之驅動線上,相同感應線位置重疊有「1」之情形,視為同一連結成分,且作為觸控位置候補。即,圖28(c)中,將被框圍繞之「1」視為同一連結成分,並作為觸控位置候補予以擷取。 Next, in order to extract the touch information from the binarized data, the link component (F804) is extracted. For example, in FIG. 28(b), when the same sensing line position is overlapped by "1" on the adjacent driving line, it is regarded as the same connecting component, and is used as a touch position candidate. That is, in FIG. 28(c), the "1" surrounded by the frame is regarded as the same connection component, and is captured as a touch position candidate.
最後,基於擷取之觸控位置候補,辨識觸控資訊(觸控大小、觸控位置等)(F805)。 Finally, based on the captured touch position candidates, the touch information (touch size, touch position, etc.) is recognized (F805).
如此,判定部59係基於已除去雜訊訊號之彼此鄰接之感應線33之訊號差分,判定觸控操作之有無。從而,可正確判定觸控操作之有無。 In this manner, the determination unit 59 determines the presence or absence of the touch operation based on the signal difference of the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other from which the noise signals have been removed. Therefore, the presence or absence of the touch operation can be correctly determined.
再者,上述例中,判定部59係基於對由減算部41a算出之彼此鄰接之感應線33之訊號差分、與正及負之臨限值(THp,THm)進行比較,而將各感應線33之訊號之差分分布3值化作成增減表,且將該增減表轉換為2值圖像。即,將已消除雜訊訊號之彼此鄰接之感應線之訊號差分輸入判 定部59。判定部59使用彼此鄰接之感應線33之訊號差分、與儲存於判定部59之正及負之臨限值(THp,THm)之比較,將各感應線33之訊號之差分分布3值化作成增減表。再者,判定部59係藉由將該增減表2值化,而將增減表轉換成2值圖像。藉此,從轉換後之2值化圖像中,抽出擷取觸控位置候補。從而,基於該2值化圖像,藉由辨識觸控資訊(觸控大小、位置等),除而可在判斷觸控操作之有無以外,可更正確地辨識觸控資訊。 Further, in the above example, the determination unit 59 compares the signal difference between the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other calculated by the subtracting unit 41a, and the positive and negative thresholds (THp, THm), and compares the sensing lines. The differential distribution of the signal of 33 is valued as an increase/decrease table, and the increase/decrease table is converted into a binary image. That is, the signal differential input of the sensing lines adjacent to each other that have eliminated the noise signals is determined. Part 59. The determining unit 59 uses the signal difference between the sensing lines 33 adjacent to each other and the positive and negative thresholds (THp, THm) stored in the determining unit 59 to compare the differential distribution of the signals of the sensing lines 33 into three. Increase or decrease the table. Furthermore, the determination unit 59 converts the increase/decrease table into a binary image by binarizing the increase/decrease table. Thereby, the touch position candidate is extracted from the converted binary image. Therefore, based on the binary image, by recognizing the touch information (touch size, position, etc.), the touch information can be more accurately recognized in addition to determining the presence or absence of the touch operation.
[實施形態17] [Embodiment 17]
圖29係顯示搭載觸控面板系統1之行動電話10之構成之功能方塊圖。行動電話(電子機器)10包含:CPU51、RAM53、ROM52、照相機54、麥克風55、揚聲器56、操作鍵57、及觸控面板系統1。各構成要素藉由資料匯流排而彼此連接。 FIG. 29 is a functional block diagram showing the configuration of the mobile phone 10 on which the touch panel system 1 is mounted. The mobile phone (electronic device) 10 includes a CPU 51, a RAM 53, a ROM 52, a camera 54, a microphone 55, a speaker 56, operation keys 57, and a touch panel system 1. The constituent elements are connected to each other by a data bus.
CPU51係控制行動電話10之動作。CPU51例如執行儲存於ROM52中之程式。操作鍵57接收行動電話機10之使用者所輸入之指示。RAM53揮發性儲存利用CPU51執行程式而產生之資料、或經由操作鍵57輸入之資料。ROM52非揮發性地儲存資料。 The CPU 51 controls the operation of the mobile phone 10. The CPU 51 executes, for example, a program stored in the ROM 52. The operation key 57 receives an instruction input by the user of the mobile phone 10. The RAM 53 volatilely stores the data generated by the CPU 51 executing the program or the data input via the operation key 57. ROM 52 stores data non-volatilely.
此外,ROM52係EPROM(Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory,可擦除可程式化唯讀記憶體)或快閃記譯體等可進行寫入及抹除之ROM。另,雖然圖20中未顯示,但行動電話10亦可構成為具備以有線連接其他電子機器之介面(IF)。 Further, the ROM 52 is a ROM that can be written and erased, such as an EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) or a flash memory. Further, although not shown in FIG. 20, the mobile phone 10 may be configured to include an interface (IF) for connecting other electronic devices by wire.
照相機54係根據使用者對操作鍵57之操作,而拍攝被攝物體。另,經拍攝之被攝物體之圖像資料儲存於RAM53或外部記憶體(例如,記憶卡)中。麥克風55係接收使用者輸入之聲音。行動電話10將該輸入之聲音(類比資料)數位化。且,行動電話10將數位化之聲音傳送至通訊對象(例如,其他行動電話)。揚聲器56係例如基於儲存於RAM53中之音樂資料等而輸出聲音。 The camera 54 captures a subject according to the user's operation of the operation key 57. In addition, the image data of the photographed subject is stored in the RAM 53 or an external memory (for example, a memory card). The microphone 55 receives the sound input by the user. The mobile phone 10 digitizes the input sound (analog data). And, the mobile phone 10 transmits the digitized sound to the communication object (for example, other mobile phones). The speaker 56 outputs sound based on, for example, music material stored in the RAM 53 or the like.
觸控面板系統1具有:觸控面板3、觸控面板控制器4、驅動線驅動電路5、及顯示裝置2。CPU51係控制觸控面板系統1之動作。CPU51係例如執行記憶於ROM52中之程式。RAM53係揮發性地儲存利用CPU51執行程式而產生之資料。ROM52係非揮發性地儲存資料。 The touch panel system 1 includes a touch panel 3, a touch panel controller 4, a drive line drive circuit 5, and a display device 2. The CPU 51 controls the action of the touch panel system 1. The CPU 51 executes, for example, a program stored in the ROM 52. The RAM 53 volatilely stores data generated by the CPU 51 executing programs. ROM 52 stores data non-volatilely.
顯示裝置2係顯示儲存於ROM52、RAM53之圖像。顯示裝置2與觸控面板3重疊、或內建於觸控面板3中。 The display device 2 displays images stored in the ROM 52 and the RAM 53. The display device 2 is overlapped with the touch panel 3 or built into the touch panel 3 .
另,第1特徵亦可如下表現。 Further, the first feature can also be expressed as follows.
[1]一種觸控面板系統,其特徵在於包含:觸控面板,其包含複數個感應器;及觸控面板控制器,其輸入來自上述感應器之訊號,且讀取資料;上述觸控面板包含:主感應器,其藉由使用者進行觸控操作而輸入訊號;及副感應器,其設置於與上述主感應器相同之觸控面板上;上述觸控面板控制器包含:減算機構,其接收來自上述主感應器之訊號、及來自上述副感應器之訊號,而從來自上述主感應器之訊號中減去來自上述副感應器之訊號。 [1] A touch panel system, comprising: a touch panel comprising a plurality of sensors; and a touch panel controller that inputs a signal from the sensor and reads data; the touch panel The main sensor includes: a main sensor that inputs a signal by a touch operation; and a sub sensor that is disposed on the same touch panel as the main sensor; the touch panel controller includes: a subtraction mechanism, It receives the signal from the main sensor and the signal from the sub-sensor, and subtracts the signal from the sub-sensor from the signal from the main sensor.
[2]如上述[1]之觸控面板系統,其中上述副感應器未被使 用者藉由觸控操作而接觸,且檢測感應器所產生之雜訊。 [2] The touch panel system according to [1] above, wherein the sub sensor is not made The user touches by touch operation and detects noise generated by the sensor.
[3]如上述[1]或[2]之觸控面板系統,其中上述主感應器與上述副感應器係鄰接而設置。 [3] The touch panel system according to [1] or [2] above, wherein the main inductor is disposed adjacent to the sub-sensor.
[4]一種觸控面板系統,其特徵在於包含:顯示裝置;觸控面板,其係配置於上述顯示裝置之顯示圖像上部等,且將複數個感應器群配置成矩陣狀;及觸控面板控制器,其輸入來自上述感應器之訊號,且讀取資料;上述觸控面板包含:主感應器群,其藉由使用者進行觸控操作來輸入訊號;及副感應器群,其設置於與上述主感應器群相同之觸控面板上;上述觸控面板控制器包含:減算機構,其接收來自上述主感應器群之訊號、及來自上述副感應器群之訊號,且從來自上述主感應器群訊號中減去來自上述副感應器群之訊號。 [4] A touch panel system, comprising: a display device; a touch panel disposed on an upper portion of a display image of the display device, and configured to configure a plurality of sensor groups in a matrix; and a panel controller that inputs a signal from the sensor and reads data; the touch panel includes: a main sensor group that inputs a signal by a touch operation by a user; and a sub sensor group, which is set On the same touch panel as the main sensor group; the touch panel controller includes: a subtraction mechanism that receives signals from the main sensor group and signals from the sub-sensor group, and from the above The signal from the sub-sensor group is subtracted from the main sensor group signal.
[5]如上述[4]之觸控面板系統,其中上述副感應器群係未被使用者藉由觸控操作而接觸,且檢測感應器群所產生之雜訊。 [5] The touch panel system according to [4] above, wherein the sub-sensor group is not contacted by a user by a touch operation, and noise generated by the sensor group is detected.
[6]如上述[4]或[5]之觸控面板系統,其中上述主感應器群與上述副感應器群係鄰接而設置。 [6] The touch panel system according to [4] or [5] above, wherein the main sensor group is disposed adjacent to the sub sensor group.
[7]如上述[1]~[6]任一者之觸控面板系統,其中上述顯示裝置係液晶顯示器、電漿顯示器、有機EL顯示器、及FED顯示器。 [7] The touch panel system according to any one of [1] to [6] above, wherein the display device is a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and an FED display.
[8]一種電子機器,其特徵在於包含上述[1]~[7]任一者之觸控面板系統。 [8] An electronic device comprising the touch panel system according to any one of [1] to [7] above.
根據上述各構成,在觸控面板內包含:主感應部,其用 以檢測觸控操作;及副感應部,其用以檢測雜訊;減算部係取得主感應部與副感應部之訊號差分。藉此,從來自主感應部之輸出訊號中除去雜訊訊號,且擷取藉由觸控操作而產生之觸控操作原本之訊號。從而,可確實除去(消除)於觸控面板反映之多種類雜訊。因此,作為除去對象之雜訊成分並不限定於包含雜訊之訊號中的AC訊號成分,而係於觸控面板反映之所有雜訊成分。即,可提供基本可消除所有雜訊成分之觸控面板系統及電子機器。 According to the above configuration, the touch panel includes: a main sensing portion, which is used The detecting touch operation is performed; and the auxiliary sensing unit is configured to detect the noise; and the subtraction unit obtains the signal difference between the main sensing unit and the auxiliary sensing unit. Thereby, the noise signal is removed from the output signal of the autonomous sensing unit, and the original signal of the touch operation generated by the touch operation is captured. Therefore, various types of noise reflected by the touch panel can be surely removed (eliminated). Therefore, the noise component to be removed is not limited to the AC signal component included in the signal of the noise, but is related to all the noise components reflected by the touch panel. That is, a touch panel system and an electronic machine that substantially eliminate all noise components can be provided.
(1)觸控面板系統1r之構成 (1) The composition of the touch panel system 1r
圖30係顯示本發明之其他觸控面板系統1r之基本構成之概略圖。觸控面板系統1r之基本構成係與第1特徵之觸控面板系統1、1a~1o大致相同。以下,針對與第1特徵之觸控面板系統1、1a~1o之差異點為中心,對第2特徵之觸控面板系統1r加以說明。另,為方便說明,具有與第1特徵之觸控面板系統1、1a~1o相同功能之構件係附註同一碼,並省略其說明。 Fig. 30 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of another touch panel system 1r of the present invention. The basic configuration of the touch panel system 1r is substantially the same as that of the touch panel systems 1 and 1a to 1o of the first feature. Hereinafter, the touch panel system 1r of the second feature will be described centering on the difference from the touch panel system 1 and 1a to 1o of the first feature. For the sake of convenience of explanation, members having the same functions as those of the touch panel systems 1 and 1a to 1o of the first feature will be denoted by the same reference numerals and will not be described.
如圖30所示,觸控面板系統1r包含:顯示裝置2、觸控面板3、觸控面板控制器4、驅動線驅動電路5、及基於觸控面板控制器4產生之觸控資訊(觸控大小、及觸控位置等)而在觸控面板3上設定有效區域並產生有效區域資訊之區域設定部8。 As shown in FIG. 30, the touch panel system 1r includes: a display device 2, a touch panel 3, a touch panel controller 4, a driving line driving circuit 5, and touch information generated by the touch panel controller 4 (touch The area setting unit 8 that sets the effective area on the touch panel 3 and generates the effective area information by controlling the size, the touch position, and the like.
驅動線驅動電路5係取得有效區域資訊,且掌握區域設定部8所設定之有效區域。接著,驅動線驅動電路5係基於 區域設定部8設定之有效區域,來驅動各驅動線35。另,關於利用驅動線驅動電路5驅動驅動線35之方法的具體例,將予以後述。 The drive line drive circuit 5 acquires the effective area information and grasps the effective area set by the area setting unit 8. Next, the drive line drive circuit 5 is based on The effective area set by the area setting unit 8 drives each of the drive lines 35. A specific example of a method of driving the drive line 35 by the drive line drive circuit 5 will be described later.
觸控面板控制器4包含:放大部71(例如,亦可為第1特徵所說明之差動放大部49或全差動放大部50),其用以放大感應線33之訊號;訊號取得部72,其取得經放大部71放大後之訊號,並分時輸出;AD轉換部73(例如,亦可為第1特徵所說明之AD轉換部48、48a),其將訊號取得部72輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號;解碼部58,其基於AD轉換部73所轉換之數位訊號,求得靜電電容之差分分布;及座標檢測部42,其基於解碼部58求得之靜電電容之差分分布,產生觸控資訊。 The touch panel controller 4 includes an amplifying portion 71 (for example, a differential amplifying portion 49 or a full differential amplifying portion 50 described in the first feature) for amplifying the signal of the sensing line 33; the signal obtaining portion 72. The signal amplified by the amplification unit 71 is obtained and outputted in a time-sharing manner. The AD conversion unit 73 (for example, the AD conversion units 48 and 48a described in the first feature) may output the signal acquisition unit 72. The analog signal is converted into a digital signal; the decoding unit 58 determines the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitance based on the digital signal converted by the AD conversion unit 73; and the difference detection of the electrostatic capacitance obtained by the coordinate detecting unit 42 based on the decoding unit 58. , generate touch information.
放大部71及訊號取得部72係分別取得有效區域資訊,且掌握區域設定部8所設定之有效區域。接著,放大部71係基於區域設定部8所設定之有效區域,進行感應線33之訊號放大。此外,訊號取得部72係基於區域設定部8所設定之有效區域,選擇放大部71所放大之感應線33之訊號,且分時輸出。另,關於利用放大部71及訊號取得部72使訊號放大之方法或取得方法之具體例,將予以後述。 The amplification unit 71 and the signal acquisition unit 72 respectively acquire the effective area information and grasp the effective area set by the area setting unit 8. Next, the amplifying unit 71 performs signal amplification of the sensing line 33 based on the effective area set by the area setting unit 8. Further, the signal acquisition unit 72 selects the signal of the sensing line 33 amplified by the amplification unit 71 based on the effective area set by the area setting unit 8, and outputs it in time division. Further, a specific example of a method or an acquisition method for amplifying a signal by the amplification unit 71 and the signal acquisition unit 72 will be described later.
AD轉換部73係將訊號取得部72輸出之類比訊號轉換成特定位元數之數位訊號。另,藉由AD轉換部73所產生之數位訊號之位元數雖然未限定位數,但若考慮到後段解碼部58及座標檢測部42之處理之精度(觸控位置之檢測精度),較好係例如在12位元以上16位元以下。 The AD conversion unit 73 converts the analog signal output from the signal acquisition unit 72 into a digital signal of a specific number of bits. Further, although the number of bits of the digital signal generated by the AD conversion unit 73 is not limited to the number of bits, the accuracy of the processing of the rear decoding unit 58 and the coordinate detecting unit 42 (the detection accuracy of the touch position) is considered. For example, it is below 12 bits and 16 bits or less.
區域設定部8包含:有效區域算出部81,其基於觸控資訊,於觸控面板3上設定有效區域,且產生有效區域之位置資訊;及儲存部82,其儲存有效區域算出部81之運算所必須之參數等。 The area setting unit 8 includes an effective area calculation unit 81 that sets an effective area on the touch panel 3 based on the touch information, and generates position information of the effective area, and a storage unit 82 that stores the operation of the effective area calculation unit 81. Required parameters, etc.
有效區域算出部81係例如包含CPU(例如,可對應上述CPU43),且取得觸控資訊,並掌握觸控面板控制器4算出之觸控面板3上之觸控位置。有效區域算出部81係基於觸控面板控制器4算出之觸控面板3上之觸控位置,於觸控面板3內設定有效區域,並產生有效區域資訊。儲存部82包含暫存器821,用以儲存有效區域算出部81之運算所必須之參數等。另,關於有效區域算出部81之運算內容(有效區域之設定方法)之具體例,將予以後述。 The effective area calculation unit 81 includes, for example, a CPU (for example, corresponding to the CPU 43), acquires touch information, and grasps the touch position on the touch panel 3 calculated by the touch panel controller 4. The effective area calculation unit 81 sets an effective area in the touch panel 3 based on the touch position on the touch panel 3 calculated by the touch panel controller 4, and generates effective area information. The storage unit 82 includes a temporary storage unit 821 for storing parameters necessary for the calculation of the effective area calculation unit 81 and the like. The specific example of the calculation content (the setting method of the effective area) of the effective area calculation unit 81 will be described later.
(2)觸控面板系統之第1動作例 (2) The first operation example of the touch panel system
其次,對圖30所示之觸控面板系統1r之第1動作例,參照圖式加以說明。最初,對由區域設定部8設定於觸控面板3上之有效區域之一例,參照圖式加以說明。圖31係顯示有效區域之一例之方塊圖。 Next, a first operation example of the touch panel system 1r shown in FIG. 30 will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an example of an effective area set by the area setting unit 8 on the touch panel 3 will be described with reference to the drawings. Figure 31 is a block diagram showing an example of an effective area.
圖31中例示之有效區域A係設定於觸控面板3之一部分區域者。又,驅動線35r及感應線33r(圖中粗實線)係分別通過有效區域。換言之,驅動線35r及感應線33r產生之各靜電電容係至少一部分包含於有效區域A內。 The effective area A illustrated in FIG. 31 is set in a partial area of the touch panel 3. Further, the drive line 35r and the induction line 33r (thick solid line in the drawing) pass through the effective area, respectively. In other words, at least a part of each of the electrostatic capacitances generated by the driving line 35r and the sensing line 33r is included in the effective area A.
例如,設定有如圖31所示之有效區域A之情形,驅動線驅動電路5對於通過有效區域A之各驅動線35r施加驅動訊號。另一方面,驅動線驅動電路5不對未通過有效區域A之 各驅動線施加驅動訊號。 For example, in the case where the effective area A as shown in FIG. 31 is set, the drive line drive circuit 5 applies a drive signal to each of the drive lines 35r passing through the effective area A. On the other hand, the drive line drive circuit 5 does not pass the active area A. A drive signal is applied to each drive line.
關於由驅動線驅動電路5驅動驅動線35之方法的具體例,係參照圖式加以說明。圖32係顯示第1動作例中驅動線驅動電路對驅動線之具體驅動方法之一例圖。另,圖32(a)係顯示將觸控面板3整面作為有效區域加以設定之情形,圖32(b)係將顯示觸控面板3之一部分設定為有效區域之情形(設定圖31所示之有效區域A之情形)。 A specific example of a method of driving the drive line 35 by the drive line drive circuit 5 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 32 is a view showing an example of a specific driving method of the driving line driving circuit for the driving line in the first operation example. 32(a) shows a case where the entire surface of the touch panel 3 is set as an effective area, and FIG. 32(b) shows a case where one portion of the touch panel 3 is set as an effective area (setting FIG. 31 is shown). The case of the effective area A).
如圖32(a)所示,將觸控面板3整面作為有效區域加以設定之情形,驅動線驅動電路5對所有驅動線35施加驅動訊號。例如,驅動線驅動電路5對每根驅動線DL施加設定之固有驅動訊號。驅動訊號係包含高位準(「1」)與低位準(「0」)之組合,且訊號位準相對時間方向發生變化。另,該驅動訊號亦可為第1特徵所說明之碼序列。此外,驅動訊號之低位準亦可為「-1」。 As shown in FIG. 32(a), the entire surface of the touch panel 3 is set as an effective area, and the drive line drive circuit 5 applies a drive signal to all of the drive lines 35. For example, the drive line drive circuit 5 applies a set inherent drive signal to each of the drive lines DL. The drive signal system includes a combination of a high level ("1") and a low level ("0"), and the signal level changes with respect to the time direction. In addition, the driving signal may also be a code sequence described by the first feature. In addition, the lower level of the drive signal can also be "-1".
另一方面,如圖32(b)所示,於觸控面板3之一部分設定有效區域A之情形,驅動線驅動電路5對通過有效區域A之驅動線35r施加驅動訊號。此時,驅動線驅動電路5對驅動線35r施加上述固有之驅動訊號。又,驅動線驅動電路5係令未通過有效區域A之各驅動線接地,並抑制該等驅動線之訊號位準隨時間之變化。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32(b), in a case where the effective area A is set in one portion of the touch panel 3, the drive line drive circuit 5 applies a drive signal to the drive line 35r passing through the effective area A. At this time, the drive line drive circuit 5 applies the above-described inherent drive signal to the drive line 35r. Further, the drive line drive circuit 5 grounds the drive lines that have not passed through the active area A, and suppresses the change of the signal level of the drive lines with time.
因此,如圖32(b)所示之例中,對通過有效區域A之驅動線35r施加之驅動訊號係與圖32(a)所示情形下,施加於該等驅動線35r之驅動訊號相同。再者,如圖32(b)所示之例中,未通過有效區域A之驅動線之訊號位準係對於時間方 向成不變值「0」。另,若未通過有效區域A之驅動線之訊號位準相對於時間方向不變,則值不限定於「0」,亦可為「1」,又可為「1」與「0」之組合(例如,鄰接之2根驅動線之一者為「0」,另一者為「1」)。 Therefore, in the example shown in Fig. 32 (b), the driving signal applied to the driving line 35r passing through the effective area A is the same as the driving signal applied to the driving line 35r in the case shown in Fig. 32 (a). . Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 32(b), the signal level of the driving line that does not pass the effective area A is for the time side. The constant value is "0". In addition, if the signal level of the driving line that does not pass the effective area A does not change with respect to the time direction, the value is not limited to "0", and may be "1" or a combination of "1" and "0". (For example, one of the two adjacent drive lines is "0" and the other is "1").
如此,若驅動線驅動電路5選擇性驅動通過有效區域A之驅動線35r,則可防止驅動線35之無用驅動。因此,可降低驅動驅動線35之電力消耗,可抑制雜訊產生,並提升觸控操作之檢測感度。此外,藉由限定地驅動驅動線35r,可提升觸控面板控制器4中觸控位置之檢測精度。 Thus, if the drive line drive circuit 5 selectively drives the drive line 35r passing through the effective area A, useless driving of the drive line 35 can be prevented. Therefore, the power consumption of the driving drive line 35 can be reduced, noise generation can be suppressed, and the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be improved. In addition, the detection accuracy of the touch position in the touch panel controller 4 can be improved by driving the driving line 35r in a limited manner.
又,由於驅動線驅動電路5以圖32所示之方式控制驅動線35,故驅動線控制器4(尤其,解碼部58)可容易地識別由觸控操作所產生之感應線33之訊號變動。 Moreover, since the driving line driving circuit 5 controls the driving line 35 in the manner shown in FIG. 32, the driving line controller 4 (in particular, the decoding unit 58) can easily recognize the signal variation of the sensing line 33 generated by the touch operation. .
又例如設定圖31所示之有效區域A時,放大部71選擇性對通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號進行放大。該放大部71之具體動作例係參照圖式加以說明。圖33係顯示第1動作例中放大部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 Further, for example, when the effective area A shown in FIG. 31 is set, the amplifying unit 71 selectively amplifies the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A. A specific operation example of the amplifying unit 71 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 33 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the amplifying unit in the first operation example.
如圖33所示,放大部71包含:放大器711,其分別對應於感應線33;及開閉開關712,其控制是否將感應線33之訊號供給至放大器711。然而,各開閉開關712係根據有效區域資訊進行控制。 As shown in FIG. 33, the amplifying portion 71 includes an amplifier 711 corresponding to the sensing line 33, and an opening and closing switch 712 that controls whether or not the signal of the sensing line 33 is supplied to the amplifier 711. However, each of the open/close switches 712 is controlled based on the effective area information.
具體而言,供給通過有效區域A之感應線33r訊號之開閉開關712成導通狀態。藉此,通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號係被放大器711放大,且自放大部71輸出。另一方面,供給未通過有效區域A之感應線之訊號之開閉開關712 成未導通狀態。藉此,未通過有效區域A之感應線訊號未被放大器711放大,且未從放大部71輸出。 Specifically, the open/close switch 712 that supplies the signal through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A is turned on. Thereby, the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A is amplified by the amplifier 711, and is output from the amplifying portion 71. On the other hand, an opening and closing switch 712 that supplies a signal that does not pass through the sensing line of the effective area A In the non-conducting state. Thereby, the sense line signal that has not passed through the effective area A is not amplified by the amplifier 711 and is not output from the amplification unit 71.
如此,藉由放大部71選擇性放大通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號,可降低訊號放大之電力消耗。另,用以選擇性放大感應線33r訊號之構造係並不限定於例示之放大器711及開閉開關712,只要為可取得同樣效果,則亦可為其他構造。例如,亦可包含可切換放大器711之活性/非活性之開關,以替代(或加上)開閉開關712。 Thus, by the amplification unit 71 selectively amplifying the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A, the power consumption of the signal amplification can be reduced. Further, the structure for selectively amplifying the sensing line 33r signal is not limited to the illustrated amplifier 711 and the opening and closing switch 712, and may have other configurations as long as the same effect can be obtained. For example, an active/inactive switch of the switchable amplifier 711 can also be included to replace (or add) the open/close switch 712.
又,訊號取得部72選擇性取得通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號,並分時輸出。該訊號取得部72之具體動作例係參照圖式加以說明。圖34係顯示第1動作例中選擇取得部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 Further, the signal acquisition unit 72 selectively acquires the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A, and outputs it in time division. A specific operation example of the signal acquisition unit 72 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 34 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the selection acquisition unit in the first operation example.
如圖34所示,訊號取得部72包含分支開關721,其從對應於各感應線33之端子中選擇其一,並連接於後段。但,分支開關721係根據有效區域資訊進行控制。 As shown in FIG. 34, the signal acquisition unit 72 includes a branch switch 721 which selects one of the terminals corresponding to each of the sensing lines 33 and is connected to the subsequent stage. However, the branch switch 721 is controlled based on the effective area information.
具體而言,分支開關721與通過有效區域A之感應線33r所對應之端子連接。藉此,經放大部71放大之通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號輸出至後段。另一方面,分支開關721不與未通過有效區域A之感應線所對應之端子連接。藉此,未通過有效區域A之感應線之訊號未輸出至後段。 Specifically, the branch switch 721 is connected to a terminal corresponding to the sensing line 33r passing through the effective area A. Thereby, the signal amplified by the amplifying portion 71 through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A is output to the subsequent stage. On the other hand, the branch switch 721 is not connected to the terminal corresponding to the sensing line that does not pass through the active area A. Thereby, the signal of the sensing line that has not passed through the effective area A is not output to the subsequent stage.
如此,藉由訊號取得部72選擇性取得通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號,並分時輸出,可防止無用訊號被輸出至訊號取得部72之後段。從而,可降低訊號取得部72後段(例如,AD轉換部73、解碼部58、及座標檢測部42)處理之 電力消耗。另,用以選擇性取得訊號且分時輸出之構造係並不限定於例示之分支開關721,只要可取得同樣效果則亦可為其他構造。 In this manner, the signal acquisition unit 72 selectively acquires the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A and outputs it in time division, thereby preventing the useless signal from being output to the subsequent stage of the signal acquisition unit 72. Therefore, the processing of the subsequent stage of the signal acquisition unit 72 (for example, the AD conversion unit 73, the decoding unit 58, and the coordinate detecting unit 42) can be reduced. power consumption. Further, the structure for selectively acquiring signals and outputting time-division is not limited to the illustrated branch switch 721, and may have other configurations as long as the same effect can be obtained.
接著,AD轉換部73將訊號取得部72輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號,且解碼部58基於該數位訊號求得觸控面板3(有效區域A)之靜電電容之差分分布,並藉由座標檢測部42參照該差分分布,檢測觸控面板3(有效區域A)之觸控位置,從而產生觸控資訊。 Then, the AD conversion unit 73 converts the analog signal outputted by the signal acquisition unit 72 into a digital signal, and the decoding unit 58 determines the differential distribution of the electrostatic capacitance of the touch panel 3 (the active area A) based on the digital signal, and coordinates the coordinates. The detecting unit 42 detects the touch position of the touch panel 3 (the active area A) by referring to the difference distribution, thereby generating touch information.
如此,觸控面板控制器4選擇性處理通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號。因此,可防止無用之訊號處理。從而,可降低訊號處理之電力消耗。此外,藉由對通過有效區域A之感應線33r之訊號進行限定處理,可提升觸控位置之檢測精度。 Thus, the touch panel controller 4 selectively processes the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the active area A. Therefore, useless signal processing can be prevented. Thereby, the power consumption of the signal processing can be reduced. In addition, by limiting the signal passing through the sensing line 33r of the effective area A, the detection accuracy of the touch position can be improved.
如上所述,觸控面板控制器4進行基於區域設定部8所設定之有效區域A之動作。另一方面,區域設定部8基於觸控面板控制器4檢測之觸控位置,來更新設定於觸控面板3上之有效區域A,並設定新有效區域。 As described above, the touch panel controller 4 performs an operation based on the effective area A set by the area setting unit 8. On the other hand, the area setting unit 8 updates the effective area A set on the touch panel 3 based on the touch position detected by the touch panel controller 4, and sets a new effective area.
以下,針對區域設定部8具體之一連串動作例,參照圖式加以說明。圖35係顯示第1動作例之區域設定部之具體動作之一例之流程圖。此外,圖36係顯示第1動作例之有效區域之設定方法之一例之圖。 Hereinafter, an example of a series of operations specific to the area setting unit 8 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of a specific operation of the area setting unit in the first operation example. FIG. 36 is a view showing an example of a method of setting an effective area in the first operation example.
以下為便於說明,如圖36所示,將感應線33整列方向(圖中上下方向、X方向)之位置作為X,將驅動線35整列方向(圖中左右方向、Y方向)之位置作為Y,並以座標(X,Y) 來表示觸控面板3內之位置。此外,將觸控面板3之左上角座標設為(0,0),將右下角座標設為(n,m)。其中,n及m至少一者為2以上之自然數,成為觸控面板3上設置有n根感應線33、及m根驅動線35者。又,將有效區域A之左上角座標設為(Xs,Ys),且將有效區域A之右下角座標設為(Xe,Ye)。 For convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. 36, the position of the induction line 33 in the entire column direction (the vertical direction in the drawing, and the X direction) is taken as X, and the position of the drive line 35 in the entire column direction (the horizontal direction in the drawing and the Y direction) is referred to as Y. And with coordinates (X, Y) The position inside the touch panel 3 is indicated. Further, the coordinates of the upper left corner of the touch panel 3 are set to (0, 0), and the coordinates of the lower right corner are set to (n, m). Among them, at least one of n and m is a natural number of 2 or more, and the touch panel 3 is provided with n sensing lines 33 and m driving lines 35. Further, the coordinates of the upper left corner of the effective area A are set to (Xs, Ys), and the coordinates of the lower right corner of the effective area A are set to (Xe, Ye).
又,圖36係例示有效區域A以觸控位置(Xp,Yp)為中心,將X方向長度設為WD_S,Y方向長度設為WD_D之情形。另,該有效區域A之設定方法之細節將予以後述。 In addition, FIG. 36 illustrates a case where the effective area A is centered on the touch position (Xp, Yp), and the length in the X direction is WD_S and the length in the Y direction is WD_D. The details of the setting method of the effective area A will be described later.
如圖35所示,有效區域算出部81在觸控面板系統1r動作開始時,應設定成為觸控面板3整面之有效區域,並算出成為(Xs,Ys)=(0,0)且(Xe,Ye)=(n,m)之有效區域資訊(步驟#1)。接著,有效區域算出部81將算出之有效區域資訊輸出(步驟#2)。 As shown in FIG. 35, when the operation of the touch panel system 1r is started, the effective area calculation unit 81 sets an effective area which is the entire surface of the touch panel 3, and calculates (Xs, Ys) = (0, 0) and ( Xe, Ye) = (n, m) effective area information (step #1). Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 outputs the calculated effective area information (step #2).
接著,有效區域算出部81取得觸控面板控制器4所產生之觸控資訊(步驟#3)。此時,有效區域算出部81藉由確認儲存於儲存部82之暫存器821中之參數,來確認係基於觸控位置而設定新有效區域之「點驅動模式」(第1模式)、或繼續將觸控面板3整面作為新有效區域來設定之「整面檢測模式」(第2模式)(步驟#4)。 Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 acquires the touch information generated by the touch panel controller 4 (step #3). At this time, the effective area calculation unit 81 confirms the "dot drive mode" (first mode) in which the new effective area is set based on the touch position, by confirming the parameter stored in the register 821 of the storage unit 82, or The "full-surface detection mode" (second mode) in which the entire surface of the touch panel 3 is set as the new effective area is continued (step #4).
「點驅動模式」及「整面檢測模式」可例如藉由使用者之指示(操作)進行切換。因此,使用者例如根據觸控面板系統之設置環境或使用環境等,可藉謀求降低電力消耗及提升觸控操作之檢測感度之「點驅動模式」、與自觸控面 板3整面無遺漏檢測觸控位置之「整面檢測模式」之任一者,使觸控面板系統1r動作。另,觸控面板系統1r之構成亦可根據使用者指示以外之因素,自動選擇該等模式來進行動作。 The "dot drive mode" and the "full face detection mode" can be switched, for example, by an instruction (operation) of the user. Therefore, the user can reduce the power consumption and improve the detection sensitivity of the touch operation, such as the "point drive mode" and the self-touch surface, for example, according to the setting environment or the use environment of the touch panel system. The entire surface of the panel 3 is provided with any one of the "full-surface detection modes" for detecting the touch position, and the touch panel system 1r is operated. In addition, the configuration of the touch panel system 1r can also automatically select these modes to operate according to factors other than the user's instruction.
「整面檢測模式」之情形(步驟#4、NO),有效區域算出部81應設定成為觸控面板3整面之新有效區域,並算出(Xs,Ys)=(0,0)且(Xe,Ye)=(n,m)之有效區域資訊(步驟#5)。接著,有效區域算出部81將算出之有效區域資訊輸出(步驟#6)。 In the case of the "full-surface detection mode" (steps #4 and NO), the effective area calculation unit 81 is set to be a new effective area of the entire surface of the touch panel 3, and calculates (Xs, Ys) = (0, 0) and ( Xe, Ye) = (n, m) effective area information (step #5). Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 outputs the calculated effective area information (step #6).
接著,輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#7、YES)則返回步驟#3,並取得該觸控資訊。另一方面,未輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#7、NO)則結束動作。 Then, when the new touch information is output (step #7, YES), the process returns to step #3, and the touch information is obtained. On the other hand, the case where the new touch information is not output (step #7, NO) ends the operation.
於「點驅動模式」之情形時(步驟#4、YES),未算出觸控面板3上觸控位置之情形(步驟#8、NO),則有效區域算出部81進行與上述「整面檢測模式」之情形相同之動作(步驟#5~#7)。藉此,因在觸控面板3整面上設定有效區域,故無論接下去對觸控面板3上哪個位置進行觸控操作,觸控面板控制器4亦可檢測該觸控操作,並檢測該觸控位置。 In the case of the "dot drive mode" (step #4, YES), when the touch position on the touch panel 3 is not calculated (steps #8, NO), the effective area calculation unit 81 performs the above-mentioned "full-surface detection". The same action as in the mode (steps #5~#7). Therefore, since the effective area is set on the entire surface of the touch panel 3, the touch panel controller 4 can detect the touch operation regardless of which position on the touch panel 3 is touched, and detect the touch operation. Touch location.
另一方面,於「點驅動模式」之情形時(步驟#4、YES),算出觸控面板3上之觸控位置之情形(步驟#8、YES),則有效區域算出部81應設定包含觸控位置之新有效區域,如圖36所示,算出成為Xs=Xp-WD_S/2、Ys=Yp-WD_D/2、Xe=Xp+WD_S/2、Ye=Yp+WD_D/2之新有效區域 資訊(步驟#9)。接著,有效區域算出部81將算出之有效區域資訊輸出(步驟#6)。藉此,有效區域算出部81可設定有包含繼而檢測觸控位置之位置之較高可能性的新有效區域A。 On the other hand, in the case of the "dot drive mode" (step #4, YES), when the touch position on the touch panel 3 is calculated (step #8, YES), the effective area calculation unit 81 should be set to include As shown in FIG. 36, the new effective area of the touch position is calculated as Xs=Xp-WD_S/2, Ys=Yp-WD_D/2, Xe=Xp+WD_S/2, and Ye=Yp+WD_D/2. region Information (step #9). Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 outputs the calculated effective area information (step #6). Thereby, the effective area calculation unit 81 can set a new effective area A including a higher possibility of detecting the position of the touch position.
接著,輸出新觸控資訊之情形時(步驟#7、YES),則返回步驟#3,並取得該觸控資訊。另一方面,未輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#7、NO)則結束動作。 Then, when the new touch information is output (step #7, YES), the process returns to step #3, and the touch information is obtained. On the other hand, the case where the new touch information is not output (step #7, NO) ends the operation.
如上所述,本例之觸控面板系統1r中,基於檢測之觸控位置,將應進行觸控位置檢測之區域即有效區域,限定性設定於觸控面板3內。從而,藉由避免無用之檢測,可降低電力消耗,並提升觸控操作之檢測感度。 As described above, in the touch panel system 1r of the present embodiment, the effective area of the area where the touch position detection should be performed is limitedly set in the touch panel 3 based on the detected touch position. Therefore, by avoiding useless detection, power consumption can be reduced, and the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be improved.
另,上述觸控面板控制器4之動作、與區域設定部8之動作(圖35之步驟#3~#9之動作)係以特定之畫面更新率(frame rate)(例如,120 Hz)反復進行。 The operation of the touch panel controller 4 and the operation of the area setting unit 8 (the operations of steps #3 to #9 in FIG. 35) are repeated at a specific frame update rate (for example, 120 Hz). get on.
且,有效區域算出部81雖然在動作中逐次確認為「點驅動模式」或「整面檢測模式」(步驟#4),但亦可不逐次進行該確認。例如,有效區域算出部81在步驟#2後進行該確認,其後無論使用者等輸入何種指示,亦可對應各者之模式來進行動作。 Further, although the effective area calculation unit 81 sequentially confirms the "dot drive mode" or the "full-surface detection mode" (step #4) during the operation, the confirmation may be performed one by one. For example, the effective area calculation unit 81 performs the confirmation after step #2, and thereafter, regardless of the instruction input by the user or the like, the operation can be performed in accordance with the mode of each.
另,區域設定部8設定之有效區域之大小(例如,WD_D及WD_S)可為固定值,亦可為可變值。有效區域大小為可變值之情形,區域設定部8若對應觸控位置之移動速度來設定新有效區域之大小,則由於下一個觸控位置包含於該新有效區域內之可能性較高,故較好。 Further, the size of the effective area (for example, WD_D and WD_S) set by the area setting unit 8 may be a fixed value or a variable value. If the effective area size is a variable value, if the area setting unit 8 sets the size of the new effective area according to the moving speed of the touch position, the possibility that the next touch position is included in the new effective area is high. Therefore, it is better.
該情形中有效區域之具體設定方法例係參照圖37加以說明。圖37係顯示第1動作例中有效區域之設定方法之其他例之圖。圖8係例示當前畫面之觸控位置為(Xpa,Ypa),下一畫面之觸控位置為(Xpb,Ypb)之情形。又,將當前幀中觸控位置之X方向之移動速度作為Vx,Y方向之移動速度作為Vy,且將畫面更新率作為f。 An example of a specific setting method of the effective area in this case will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 37 is a view showing another example of the method of setting the effective area in the first operation example. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where the touch position of the current screen is (Xpa, Ypa) and the touch position of the next screen is (Xpb, Ypb). Further, the moving speed in the X direction of the touch position in the current frame is taken as Vx, the moving speed in the Y direction is Vy, and the screen update rate is taken as f.
區域設定部8係基於當前畫面中觸控位置(Xpa,Ypa)及移動速度(Vx,Vy),以包含下一畫面中觸控位置(Xpb,Ypb)之方式,來設定新有效區域。即,區域設定部8以成為WD_S≧2×Vx/f、WD_D≧2×Vy/f之方式,設定新有效區域。例如,Vy=1000 mm/s,f=120 Hz之情形,成為WD_D≧16.7 mm。 The area setting unit 8 sets the new effective area by including the touch position (Xpb, Ypb) in the next screen based on the touch position (Xpa, Ypa) and the moving speed (Vx, Vy) in the current screen. In other words, the area setting unit 8 sets the new effective area so that WD_S ≧ 2 × Vx / f and WD_D ≧ 2 × Vy / f. For example, when Vy = 1000 mm/s and f = 120 Hz, it becomes WD_D ≧ 16.7 mm.
又,區域設定部8亦可將依序取得之觸控位置儲存於儲存部82中,求得觸控位置之變動量,並基於該變動量,求的當前畫面中觸控位置之移動速度。 Moreover, the area setting unit 8 may store the sequentially acquired touch positions in the storage unit 82, determine the amount of change in the touch position, and determine the moving speed of the touch position in the current screen based on the amount of change.
此外,區域設定部8亦未必須設定以觸控位置為中心之有效區域。例如,在觸控面板3之邊端附近檢測觸控位置之情形,區域設定部8亦可設定觸控位置偏向該邊端側之有效區域。又,區域設定部8亦可設定基於觸控位置移動方向之有效區域。例如,區域設定部8亦可設定觸控位置偏向與觸控位置移動方向相反方向之有效區域。 Further, the area setting unit 8 does not have to set an effective area centered on the touch position. For example, when the touch position is detected near the edge of the touch panel 3, the area setting unit 8 can also set the effective area where the touch position is biased toward the side end. Further, the area setting unit 8 can also set an effective area based on the moving direction of the touch position. For example, the area setting unit 8 may also set an effective area in which the touch position is biased in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the touch position.
(3)觸控面板系統之第2動作例 (3) The second operation example of the touch panel system
圖30所示之觸控面板系統1r,因觸控面板控制器4基於觸控面板3之靜電電容之差分分布來檢測觸控位置,故即 使觸控面板3上有複數個觸控位置,亦可分別檢測各觸控位置(可對應多點觸控)。因此,以下,針對對應於多點觸控之觸控面板系統1r之動作例(第2動作例)加以說明。 The touch panel system 1r shown in FIG. 30 detects the touch position by the touch panel controller 4 based on the differential distribution of the electrostatic capacitance of the touch panel 3, that is, The touch panel 3 has a plurality of touch positions, and each touch position can be detected separately (corresponding to multi-touch). Therefore, an operation example (second operation example) of the touch panel system 1r corresponding to multi-touch will be described below.
第2動作例中,雖然觸控面板控制器4係可檢測複數個觸控位置,且區域設定部8可基於複數個觸控位置設定有效區域者,但該基本動作係與上述第1動作例共通。因此,下述第2動作例之說明中,與第1動作例共通之部分係適當參酌第1動作例之說明,並省略對其詳細說明。 In the second operation example, the touch panel controller 4 can detect a plurality of touch positions, and the area setting unit 8 can set the effective area based on the plurality of touch positions, but the basic operation system and the first operation example Common. Therefore, in the following description of the second operation example, the part common to the first operation example is appropriately described with reference to the first operation example, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
最初,關於藉由區域設定部8設定於觸控面板3內之有效區域之一例,參照圖式加以說明。圖38係顯示第2動作例中設定於觸控面板3內之有效區域之一例之方塊圖。另,圖38係例示有2個觸控位置在觸控面板3上分開之情形所設定之有效區域A1、A2。 First, an example of an effective area set in the touch panel 3 by the area setting unit 8 will be described with reference to the drawings. 38 is a block diagram showing an example of an effective area set in the touch panel 3 in the second operation example. In addition, FIG. 38 illustrates effective areas A1 and A2 set in the case where two touch positions are separated on the touch panel 3.
圖38中例示之有效區域A1、A2係分別設定於觸控面板3內之一部分之區域內。此外,驅動線35r1及感應線33r1(圖中粗實線)係分別通過有效區域A1,且驅動線35r2及感應線33r2(圖中粗實線)係分別通過有效區域A2。換言之,驅動線35r1及感應線33r1所形成之各檢測區域X係至少一部分包含於有效區域A1內,驅動線35r2及感應線33r2所產生之各檢測區域X係至少一部分包含於有效區域A2內。 The effective areas A1 and A2 illustrated in FIG. 38 are respectively set in the area of one portion of the touch panel 3. Further, the driving line 35r1 and the sensing line 33r1 (thick solid line in the drawing) pass through the effective area A1, respectively, and the driving line 35r2 and the sensing line 33r2 (thick solid line in the drawing) pass through the effective area A2, respectively. In other words, at least a part of each detection region X formed by the driving line 35r1 and the sensing line 33r1 is included in the effective area A1, and at least a part of each detection area X generated by the driving line 35r2 and the sensing line 33r2 is included in the effective area A2.
例如,觸控面板3內,於圖38所示之設定有有效區域A1、A2之情形,驅動線驅動電路5係分別對通過有效區域A1之驅動線35r1、及通過有效區域A2之驅動線35r2施加驅動訊號。另一方面,驅動線驅動電路5不分別對未通過有 效區域A1、A2任一者之驅動線施加驅動訊號。 For example, in the touch panel 3, in the case where the effective areas A1 and A2 are set as shown in FIG. 38, the driving line driving circuit 5 respectively drives the driving line 35r1 passing through the effective area A1 and the driving line 35r2 passing through the effective area A2. Apply a drive signal. On the other hand, the drive line drive circuit 5 does not have a separate pass A drive signal is applied to the drive lines of any of the effect areas A1 and A2.
第2動作例中,關於由驅動線驅動電路5對驅動線35之驅動方法的具體例,係參照圖式加以說明。圖39係顯示第2動作例中利用驅動線驅動電路對驅動線之具體驅動方法之一例之圖。 In the second operation example, a specific example of the method of driving the drive line 35 by the drive line drive circuit 5 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 39 is a view showing an example of a specific driving method of the driving line by the driving line driving circuit in the second operation example.
如圖39所示,驅動線驅動電路5係分別對通過有效區域A1之驅動線35r1、及通過有效區域A2之驅動線35r2施加上述固有之驅動訊號(參照圖32)。再者,驅動線驅動電路5係令未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之各驅動線接地等,並抑制該等驅動線之訊號位準隨時間產生變化。 As shown in FIG. 39, the drive line drive circuit 5 applies the above-described unique drive signal to the drive line 35r1 passing through the effective area A1 and the drive line 35r2 passing through the effective area A2 (see FIG. 32). Further, the drive line drive circuit 5 is configured to ground the drive lines that have not passed through any of the effective areas A1 and A2, and to suppress the change of the signal level of the drive lines with time.
如此,在多點觸控時,驅動線驅動電路5亦藉由選擇性驅動通過有效區域A1、A2之驅動線35r1、35r2,而可防止驅動線35進行無用驅動。因此,可降低驅動線35之驅動消耗之消耗電力,且可抑制雜訊產生,並提升觸控操作之檢測感度。又,藉由限定性驅動驅動線35r1、35r2,可提升觸控面板控制器4中觸控位置之檢測精度。 Thus, in the multi-touch, the drive line drive circuit 5 can also prevent the drive line 35 from being uselessly driven by selectively driving the drive lines 35r1, 35r2 through the active areas A1, A2. Therefore, the power consumption of the driving consumption of the driving line 35 can be reduced, noise generation can be suppressed, and the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be improved. Moreover, by selectively driving the driving lines 35r1, 35r2, the detection accuracy of the touch position in the touch panel controller 4 can be improved.
又,例如在觸控面板3內,設定圖38所示之有效區域A1、A2時,放大部71選擇性放大通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1、及通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2之各訊號。關於該放大部71之具體性動作例係參照圖式加以說明。圖40係顯示第2動作例中放大部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。另,如圖40所示之放大部71與第1動作例所說明之放大部71(參照圖33)相同。 Further, for example, when the effective areas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 38 are set in the touch panel 3, the amplifying unit 71 selectively amplifies the respective signals passing through the sensing line 33r1 of the effective area A1 and the sensing line 33r2 passing through the effective area A2. . Specific operational examples of the amplifying unit 71 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 40 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the amplifying unit in the second operation example. The amplifying portion 71 shown in FIG. 40 is the same as the amplifying portion 71 (see FIG. 33) described in the first operation example.
如圖40所示,分別供給通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1、 及通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2之各訊號之開閉開關712成導通狀態。藉此,通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1、及通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2之各訊號由放大器711予以放大,且自放大部71輸出。另一方面,供給未通過有效區域A1、A2之任一者之感應線訊號之開閉開關712成非導通狀態。藉此,未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之感應線訊號係未被放大器711放大,且未從放大部71輸出。 As shown in FIG. 40, the sensing line 33r1 passing through the effective area A1 is respectively supplied. And the opening and closing switch 712 of each signal passing through the sensing line 33r2 of the effective area A2 is turned on. Thereby, the signals passing through the sensing line 33r1 of the effective area A1 and the sensing line 33r2 passing through the effective area A2 are amplified by the amplifier 711 and output from the amplifying portion 71. On the other hand, the opening and closing switch 712 that supplies the sensing line signal that has not passed through any of the effective areas A1 and A2 is in a non-conduction state. Thereby, the sense line signal that has not passed through any of the effective areas A1 and A2 is not amplified by the amplifier 711 and is not output from the amplification unit 71.
藉此,放大部71係藉由選擇性對通過有效區域A1、A2之感應線33r1、33r2之訊號進行放大,可降低感應線33之訊號放大所耗費之消耗電力。 Thereby, the amplifying unit 71 can reduce the power consumption of the signal amplification of the sensing line 33 by selectively amplifying the signals passing through the sensing lines 33r1 and 33r2 of the effective areas A1 and A2.
又,訊號取得部72係選擇性取得通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1之訊號、及通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2之訊號,且分時輸出。關於該訊號取得部72之具體動作例,係參照圖式加以說明。圖41係顯示第2動作例中選擇取得部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。另,圖41所示之訊號取得部72與第1動作例所說明之訊號取得部72(參照圖34)相同。 Further, the signal acquisition unit 72 selectively acquires the signal passing through the sensing line 33r1 of the effective area A1 and the signal passing through the sensing line 33r2 of the effective area A2, and outputs the time division. A specific operation example of the signal acquisition unit 72 will be described with reference to the drawings. 41 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the selection acquisition unit in the second operation example. The signal acquisition unit 72 shown in FIG. 41 is the same as the signal acquisition unit 72 (see FIG. 34) described in the first operation example.
如圖41所示,分支開關721可與分別對應於通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1、及通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2之端子連接。藉此,經放大部71放大之通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1之訊號、及經放大部71放大之通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2之訊號分別輸出至後段。另一方面,分支開關721不與未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之感應線所對應之端子連接。藉此,未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之感應線之訊號不被輸出至後段。 As shown in FIG. 41, the branch switch 721 can be connected to terminals corresponding to the sensing line 33r1 passing through the active area A1 and the sensing line 33r2 passing through the effective area A2, respectively. Thereby, the signal amplified by the amplifying portion 71 through the sensing line 33r1 of the effective area A1 and the signal amplified by the amplifying portion 71 through the sensing line 33r2 of the effective area A2 are respectively output to the subsequent stage. On the other hand, the branch switch 721 is not connected to a terminal corresponding to the sensing line that does not pass through any of the effective areas A1, A2. Thereby, the signal of the sensing line that has not passed through any of the effective areas A1, A2 is not output to the latter stage.
如此,藉由訊號取得部72選擇性取得通過有效區域A1、A2之感應線33r1、33r2之訊號,並分時輸出,可防止無用訊號被輸出至訊號取得部72之後段。從而,可降低訊號取得部72後段(例如,AD轉換部73、解碼部58、及座標檢測部42)處理所消耗之電力消耗。 In this manner, the signal acquisition unit 72 selectively acquires the signals passing through the sensing lines 33r1 and 33r2 of the effective areas A1 and A2 and outputs them in time division, thereby preventing the unnecessary signals from being output to the subsequent stage of the signal obtaining unit 72. Therefore, the power consumption consumed by the processing of the subsequent stages of the signal acquisition unit 72 (for example, the AD conversion unit 73, the decoding unit 58, and the coordinate detecting unit 42) can be reduced.
接著,AD轉換部73將訊號取得部72輸出之類比訊號轉換成數位訊號,且解碼部58基於該數位訊號求得觸控面板3(有效區域A1、有效區域A2)之靜電電容之差分分布,並藉由座標檢測部42參照該差分分布,檢測觸控面板3(有效區域A1、A2)之觸控位置,從而產生觸控資訊。另,此時解碼部58及座標檢測部42不僅可於有效區域A1、A2上,即使在驅動線35r1與感應線33r2通過之區域上檢測觸控位置,亦可於驅動線35r2與感應線33r1通過之區域上檢測觸控位置。 Then, the AD conversion unit 73 converts the analog signal outputted by the signal acquisition unit 72 into a digital signal, and the decoding unit 58 determines the difference distribution of the electrostatic capacitances of the touch panel 3 (the effective area A1 and the effective area A2) based on the digital signal. The coordinate detection unit 42 refers to the difference distribution to detect the touch position of the touch panel 3 (the active areas A1 and A2), thereby generating touch information. In addition, at this time, the decoding unit 58 and the coordinate detecting unit 42 can detect not only the touch position but also the driving line 35r2 and the sensing line 33r1 on the effective areas A1 and A2, even in the area where the driving line 35r1 and the sensing line 33r2 pass. The touch position is detected on the area through which it passes.
如此,在多點觸控中,觸控面板控制器4藉由選擇性對通過有效區域A1、A2之感應線33r1、33r2之訊號進行處理,可防止無用之訊號處理。從而,可降低訊號處理所消耗之電力消耗。此外,藉由對通過有效區域A1、A2之感應線33r1、33r2之訊號進行限定性處理,可提升觸控位置之檢測精度。 Thus, in multi-touch, the touch panel controller 4 can prevent useless signal processing by selectively processing the signals passing through the sensing lines 33r1, 33r2 of the active areas A1, A2. Thereby, the power consumption consumed by the signal processing can be reduced. In addition, by performing limited processing on the signals passing through the sensing lines 33r1 and 33r2 of the effective areas A1 and A2, the detection accuracy of the touch position can be improved.
繼而,關於區域設定部8設定(更新)有效區域之具體一連串動作例,係參照圖式加以說明。圖42係顯示第2動作例中區域設定部之具體動作之一例之流程圖。此外,圖43係顯示第2動作例中有效區域之設定方法之一例之圖。 另,以下,與第1動作例之說明(參照圖36)相同,將感應線33之整列方向(圖43中上下方向、X方向)之位置作為X,且將驅動線35之整列方向(圖43中左右方向、Y方向)之位置作為Y,並以座標(X,Y)表示觸控面板3內之位置,且將觸控面板3之左上角座標設為(0,0),將右下角座標設為(n,m)。又,將有效區域Ai之左上角座標設為(Xsi,Ysi),且將有效區域Ai之右下角座標設為(Xei,Yei)。 Next, a specific series of operation examples in which the area setting unit 8 sets (updates) the effective area will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a specific operation of the area setting unit in the second operation example. In addition, FIG. 43 is a view showing an example of a method of setting an effective area in the second operation example. In the following, similarly to the description of the first operation example (see FIG. 36), the position of the entire alignment direction of the induction line 33 (the vertical direction in the FIG. 43 and the X direction) is taken as X, and the alignment direction of the drive line 35 is shown. The position of the left-right direction and the Y-direction of 43 is Y, and the position inside the touch panel 3 is represented by a coordinate (X, Y), and the coordinates of the upper left corner of the touch panel 3 are set to (0, 0), which will be right. The lower corner coordinates are set to (n, m). Further, the upper left corner coordinate of the effective area Ai is set to (Xsi, Ysi), and the lower right corner coordinate of the effective area Ai is set to (Xei, Yei).
i係用以識別有效區域及有效區域資訊之編號,可取1以上且max以下之值(max為2以上自然數)。即,max係區域設定部8可設定之有效區域之數之上限值,例如,其亦可與觸控面板控制器4可檢測之觸控位置之數相等。藉此,若將驅動設定部8可設定之有效區域之數設定為上限值(max),則由於可抑制區域設定部8之運算量過剩,及區域設定部8設定之有效區域總面積過大,故較好。 i is a number for identifying the effective area and the effective area information, and may take a value of 1 or more and max or less (max is a natural number of 2 or more). That is, the max-based area setting unit 8 can set the upper limit of the number of effective areas, for example, it can be equal to the number of touch positions detectable by the touch panel controller 4. By setting the number of effective areas that can be set by the drive setting unit 8 to the upper limit value (max), the calculation amount of the area setting unit 8 can be suppressed from being excessive, and the total area of the effective area set by the area setting unit 8 is too large. Therefore, it is better.
圖43係例示有效區域A1以觸控位置(Xp1,Yp1)為中心,將X方向長度設為WD_S1,Y方向長度設為WD_D1,且有效區域A2以觸控位置(Xp2,Yp2)為中心,將X方向長度設為WD_S2,Y方向長度設為WD_D2之情形。另,該有效區域A1、A2之設定方法之細節將予以後述。 FIG. 43 illustrates that the effective area A1 is centered on the touch position (Xp1, Yp1), the length in the X direction is set to WD_S1, the length in the Y direction is set to WD_D1, and the effective area A2 is centered on the touch position (Xp2, Yp2). The case where the length in the X direction is WD_S2 and the length in the Y direction is WD_D2. The details of the setting method of the effective areas A1 and A2 will be described later.
如圖42所示,有效區域算出部81在觸控面板系統1r動作開始時,應設定成為觸控面板3之整面之有效區域,並算出成為(Xs1,Ys1)=(0,0)且(Xe1,Ye1)=(n,m)之有效區域資訊。此時,雖然有效區域算出部81亦可將剩餘之i=2~max之有效區域資訊作為某個值而算出,但本例中,係與i=1 之有效區域資訊相同,作為(Xsi,Ysi)=(0,0)且(Xei,Yei)=(n,m)而算出(步驟#11)。 As shown in FIG. 42 , when the touch panel system 1 r starts, the effective area calculation unit 81 sets an effective area that is the entire surface of the touch panel 3 and calculates (Xs1, Ys1)=(0, 0). (Xe1, Ye1) = (n, m) effective area information. In this case, the effective area calculation unit 81 may calculate the effective area information of the remaining i=2 to max as a certain value, but in this example, it is i=1. The effective area information is the same, and is calculated as (Xsi, Ysi) = (0, 0) and (Xei, Yei) = (n, m) (step #11).
接著,有效區域算出部81輸出步驟#11中算出之i=1~max之有效區域資訊(步驟#12)。另,觸控面板控制器4之各部係基於i=1之有效區域資訊所對應之有效區域A1,來進行驅動線35之驅動或感應線33之訊號處理,但關於i=2~max之有效區域資訊則忽略。 Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 outputs the effective area information of i=1 to max calculated in step #11 (step #12). In addition, each part of the touch panel controller 4 performs driving of the driving line 35 or signal processing of the sensing line 33 based on the effective area A1 corresponding to the effective area information of i=1, but is effective for i=2~max. Regional information is ignored.
其次,有效區域算出部81取得觸控面板控制器4產生之觸控資訊(步驟#13)。此時,有效區域算出部81係藉由確認儲存於儲存部82之暫存器821中之參數,而確認為「點驅動模式」(第1模式)、或為「整面檢測模式」(第2模式)(步驟#14)。 Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 acquires the touch information generated by the touch panel controller 4 (step #13). At this time, the effective area calculation unit 81 confirms the "dot drive mode" (first mode) or the "full-surface detection mode" by confirming the parameter stored in the register 821 of the storage unit 82. 2 mode) (step #14).
於「整面檢測模式」之情形(步驟#14、NO),有效區域算出部81應設定成為觸控面板3之整面之新有效區域,並算出(Xs1,Ys1)=(0,0)且(Xe1,Ye1)=(n,m)之有效區域資訊。此時,雖然有效區域算出部81亦可將剩餘之i=2~max之有效區域資訊作為某個值而算出,但本例中,係與i=1之有效區域資訊相同,作為(Xsi,Ysi)=(0,0)且(Xei,Yei)=(n,m)而算出(步驟#15)。 In the case of the "full-surface detection mode" (step #14, NO), the effective area calculation unit 81 sets a new effective area which is the entire surface of the touch panel 3, and calculates (Xs1, Ys1) = (0, 0) And (Xe1, Ye1) = (n, m) effective area information. In this case, the effective area calculation unit 81 may calculate the effective area information of the remaining i=2 to max as a certain value. However, in this example, the effective area information of i=1 is the same as (Xsi, Ysi)=(0,0) and (Xei,Yei)=(n,m) are calculated (step #15).
其次,有效區域算出部81輸出步驟#15中算出之i=1~max之有效區域資訊(步驟#16)。另,觸控面板控制器4之各部係基於i=1之有效區域資訊所對應之有效區域A1,而進行驅動線35之驅動或感應線33之訊號處理,但關於i=2~max之有效區域資訊則忽略。 Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 outputs the effective area information of i=1 to max calculated in step #15 (step #16). In addition, each part of the touch panel controller 4 performs driving of the driving line 35 or signal processing of the sensing line 33 based on the effective area A1 corresponding to the effective area information of i=1, but is effective for i=2~max. Regional information is ignored.
接著,輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#17、YES)則返回步驟#13,並取得該觸控資訊。另一方面,未輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#17、NO)則結束動作。 Then, when the new touch information is output (step #17, YES), the process returns to step #13, and the touch information is obtained. On the other hand, the case where the new touch information is not output (step #17, NO) ends the operation.
於「點驅動模式」之情形(步驟#14、YES)下,若為不檢測觸控面板3上觸控位置之情形(步驟#18、NO),則有效區域算出部81進行與上述「整面檢測模式」之情形相同之動作(步驟#15~#17)。藉此,因在觸控面板3整面上設定有效區域,故無論接著對觸控面板3上哪個位置進行觸控操作,觸控面板控制器4均可檢測觸控位置。 In the case of the "dot drive mode" (step #14, YES), if the touch position on the touch panel 3 is not detected (step #18, NO), the effective area calculation unit 81 performs the above-mentioned "complete" The same action as in the face detection mode (steps #15 to #17). Therefore, since the effective area is set on the entire surface of the touch panel 3, the touch panel controller 4 can detect the touch position regardless of which position on the touch panel 3 is subsequently touched.
另一方面,為「點驅動模式」之情形(步驟#14、YES),檢測觸控面板3上之觸控位置之情形(步驟#18、YES),則有效區域算出部81應設定包含觸控位置之新有效區域,例如如圖43所示,算出成為Xsi=Xpi-WD_Si/2、Ysi=Ypi-WD_Di/2、Xei=Xpi+WD_Si/2、Yei=Ypi+WD_Di/2之i=1~num之新有效區域資訊(圖43之例中為num=2)。即,num係有效區域算出部8設定之有效區域數,例如,亦可與觸控面板控制器4算出之觸控位置數相等。此時,雖然有效區域算出部81亦可將剩餘之i=num+1~max之有效區域資訊作為某個值算出,但本例中,係作為(Xsi,Ysi)=(0,0)且(Xei,Yei)=(n,m)而算出(步驟#19)。 On the other hand, in the case of the "dot drive mode" (step #14, YES), when the touch position on the touch panel 3 is detected (step #18, YES), the effective area calculation unit 81 should set the touch. The new effective area of the control position, for example, as shown in FIG. 43, is calculated as i = Xpi - WD_Si / 2, Ysi = Ypi - WD_Di / 2, Xei = Xpi + WD_Si / 2, and Yei = Ypi + WD_Di / 2 New effective area information of 1~num (in the example of Fig. 43, num=2). In other words, the number of effective areas set by the num-based effective area calculation unit 8 may be equal to, for example, the number of touch positions calculated by the touch panel controller 4. In this case, the effective area calculation unit 81 may calculate the effective area information of the remaining i=num+1~max as a certain value, but in this example, it is (Xsi, Ysi)=(0, 0) and (Xei, Yei) = (n, m) is calculated (step #19).
其次,有效區域算出部81輸出步驟#19算出之i=1~max之有效區域資訊(步驟#16)。另,觸控面板控制器4之各部係基於i=1~num之各有效區域資訊所對應之有效區域A1~Anum,進行驅動線35之驅動或感應線33之訊號處理, 但關於i=num+1~max之有效區域資訊則忽略。藉此,有效區域算出部81可設定包含隨後觸控位置之可能性較高的新有效區域A1~Anum。 Next, the effective area calculation unit 81 outputs the effective area information of i=1 to max calculated in step #19 (step #16). In addition, each part of the touch panel controller 4 performs driving of the driving line 35 or signal processing of the sensing line 33 based on the effective areas A1 to Anum corresponding to the effective area information of i=1~num. However, the valid area information about i=num+1~max is ignored. Thereby, the effective area calculation unit 81 can set the new effective areas A1 to Anum which are highly likely to include the subsequent touch positions.
接著,輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#17、YES)則返回步驟#13並取得該觸控資訊。另一方面,未輸出新觸控資訊之情形(步驟#17、NO)則結束動作。 Then, when the new touch information is output (step #17, YES), the process returns to step #13 and the touch information is obtained. On the other hand, the case where the new touch information is not output (step #17, NO) ends the operation.
如上所述,本例之觸控面板1r中,在觸控面板控制器4檢測複數個觸控位置之情形(多點觸控時)時,區域設定部8亦可設定有效區域。且,本例之觸控面板系統1r中,基於檢測之各個觸控位置,應進行觸控位置檢測之區域即有效區域係限定設定於觸控面板3內。因此,藉由避免無用之檢測,可降低電力消耗,並提升觸控操作之檢測感度。 As described above, in the touch panel 1r of the present embodiment, when the touch panel controller 4 detects a plurality of touch positions (at the time of multi-touch), the area setting unit 8 can also set the effective area. In the touch panel system 1r of the present embodiment, the effective area for detecting the touch position based on the detected touch positions is limited to be set in the touch panel 3. Therefore, by avoiding useless detection, power consumption can be reduced, and the detection sensitivity of the touch operation can be improved.
又,本例之觸控面板系統1r中,對應於檢測之各觸控位置之有效區域係被分別設定。因此,於區域設定部8設定之各個有效區域間,可設置間隙(非有效區域之區域)。因此,可縮小區域設定部8所設定之有效區域總面積。 Moreover, in the touch panel system 1r of this example, the effective areas corresponding to the detected touch positions are individually set. Therefore, a gap (a region of the non-effective area) can be provided between the effective areas set by the area setting unit 8. Therefore, the total area of the effective area set by the area setting unit 8 can be reduced.
另,上述觸控面板控制器4之動作、與區域設定部8之動作(圖42之步驟#13~#19之動作)係以特定之畫面更新率(例如,120 Hz)反復進行。 The operation of the touch panel controller 4 and the operation of the area setting unit 8 (the operations of steps #13 to #19 in FIG. 42) are repeated at a specific screen update rate (for example, 120 Hz).
又,有效區域算出部81雖然在動作中逐次確認係「點驅動模式」、或「整面檢測模式」(步驟#14),但亦可不逐次進行該確認。例如,有效區域算出部81亦可在步驟#12後進行該確認,之後由使用者等輸入任何指示後,再進行對應各者模式之動作。 Further, the effective area calculation unit 81 sequentially confirms the "dot drive mode" or the "full-surface detection mode" (step #14) during the operation, but may not perform the confirmation one by one. For example, the effective area calculation unit 81 may perform the confirmation after step #12, and then input any instruction from the user or the like, and then perform the operation corresponding to each mode.
此外,有效區域算出部81為「點驅動模式」時,無論是否藉由觸控面板控制器4檢測觸控位置,均可藉特定時序(例如,每特定之畫面數),設定成為觸控面板3整面之新有效區域。具體亦可例如,圖42中,在進行步驟#18前判斷是否為特定之時序,若係特定之時序則進行步驟#15,否則則進行步驟#18。 Further, when the effective area calculation unit 81 is in the "dot drive mode", whether or not the touch position is detected by the touch panel controller 4 can be set as a touch panel by a specific timing (for example, for each specific number of screens). 3 new effective area of the whole face. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not a specific timing is performed before step #18, and if it is a specific timing, step #15 is performed, otherwise, step #18 is performed.
若如此,區域設定部8在對應於觸控面板控制器4依序檢測之觸控位置而依序設定有效區域之動作(點驅動)開始後,即使於觸控面板3上其他部位進行觸控操作,亦因在特定之時序設定成為觸控面板3整面之有效區域,故該觸控位置可由觸控面板控制器4檢測。 In this manner, the area setting unit 8 performs touch operation on other parts of the touch panel 3 after the action (point drive) of sequentially setting the effective area corresponding to the touch position detected by the touch panel controller 4 in sequence. The operation is also determined by the touch panel controller 4 because the specific timing is set to be an effective area of the entire surface of the touch panel 3.
又,區域設定部8所設定之有效區域之大小(例如WD_Di及WD_Si)可相同,但每有效區域(每i)亦可不同。且,區域設定部8所設定之有效區域之大小(例如WD_Di及WD_Si)可為固定值,亦可為可變值。有效區域之大小為可變值時,亦如第1動作例所述般(參照圖37),區域設定部8若對應於觸控位置之移動速度而設定新有效區域之大小時,由於接著檢測觸控位置之位置包含在該新有效區域內之可能效較高,故而較佳。 Further, the size of the effective area (for example, WD_Di and WD_Si) set by the area setting unit 8 may be the same, but may be different for each effective area (per i). Further, the size of the effective area (for example, WD_Di and WD_Si) set by the area setting unit 8 may be a fixed value or a variable value. When the size of the effective area is a variable value, as described in the first operation example (see FIG. 37), when the area setting unit 8 sets the size of the new effective area in accordance with the moving speed of the touch position, it is detected next. It is preferred that the position of the touch position is more likely to be included in the new effective area.
關於該情形之有效區域之具體設定方法之例,係參照圖44加以說明。圖44係顯示第2動作例中有效區域之設定方法之其他例之圖。圖44係例示當前畫面之第1觸控位置為(Xp1a,Yp1a),第2觸控位置為(Xp2a,Yp2a),且下一畫面中第1觸控位置為(Xp1b,Yp1b),第2觸控位置為(Xp2b, Yp2b)之情形。又,將當前畫面中第1觸控位置之X方向之移動速度作為Vx1,Y方向之移動速度作為Vy1,將當前畫面中第2觸控位置之X方向之移動速度作為Vx2,Y方向之移動速度作為Vy2,且將畫面更新率作為f。 An example of a specific setting method of the effective area in this case will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 44 is a view showing another example of the method of setting the effective area in the second operation example. 44 shows that the first touch position of the current screen is (Xp1a, Yp1a), the second touch position is (Xp2a, Yp2a), and the first touch position in the next screen is (Xp1b, Yp1b), and the second The touch position is (Xp2b, The case of Yp2b). Further, the moving speed in the X direction of the first touch position on the current screen is taken as Vx1, and the moving speed in the Y direction is Vy1, and the moving speed in the X direction of the second touch position in the current screen is taken as Vx2, and the moving in the Y direction. The speed is Vy2, and the picture update rate is taken as f.
區域設定部8基於當前畫面中第1觸控位置(Xp1a,Yp1a)及移動速度(Vx1,Vy1),以包含下一畫面中第1觸控位置(Xp1b,Yp1b)之方式,來設定新有效區域。即,區域設定部8係以成為WD_S1≧2×Vx1/f、WD_D1≧2×Vy1/f之方式,設定新有效區域。同樣,區域設定部8係基於當前畫面中第2觸控位置(Xp2a,Yp2a)及移動速度(Vx2,Vy2),以包含下一畫面中第2觸控位置(Xp2b,Yp2b)之方式,設定新有效區域。即,區域設定部8係以成為WD_S2≧2×Vx2/f、WD_D2≧2×Vy2/f之方式,設定新有效區域。 The area setting unit 8 sets a new effective manner based on the first touch position (Xp1a, Yp1a) and the moving speed (Vx1, Vy1) in the current screen, including the first touch position (Xp1b, Yp1b) in the next screen. region. In other words, the area setting unit 8 sets the new effective area so that WD_S1≧2×Vx1/f and WD_D1≧2×Vy1/f. Similarly, the area setting unit 8 sets the second touch position (Xp2a, Yp2a) and the moving speed (Vx2, Vy2) in the current screen to include the second touch position (Xp2b, Yp2b) in the next screen. New effective area. In other words, the area setting unit 8 sets the new effective area so that WD_S2≧2×Vx2/f and WD_D2≧2×Vy2/f.
又,區域設定部8中,亦可將依序取得之各觸控位置儲存於儲存部82中,且求得各觸控位置之變動量,並基於該變動量,謀求當前畫面中各觸控位置之移動速度。 Further, in the area setting unit 8, the touch positions sequentially acquired may be stored in the storage unit 82, and the amount of change in each touch position may be obtained, and based on the amount of change, each touch in the current screen may be obtained. The speed at which the position moves.
此外,區域設定部8亦可未必以各者之觸控位置為中心來設定各者之有效區域。例如,在觸控面板3之邊端附近檢測某個觸控位置時,區域設定部8亦可設定該觸控位置偏向該邊端側之有效區域。又,區域設定部8亦可基於觸控位置移動方向設定有效區域。例如,區域設定部8亦可設定該觸控位置偏向於與某個觸控位置之移動方向相反之方向之有效區域。 Further, the area setting unit 8 does not necessarily set the effective area of each of the respective touch positions. For example, when detecting a certain touch position near the edge of the touch panel 3, the area setting unit 8 may also set the effective area of the touch position to the side end side. Further, the area setting unit 8 can also set the effective area based on the moving position of the touch position. For example, the area setting unit 8 may also set an effective area in which the touch position is biased in a direction opposite to a moving direction of a certain touch position.
又,至此之第2動作例之說明中,雖然主要例示觸控面 板3上2個觸控位置分開之情形,但如圖30所示之觸控面板系統1r,即使在觸控面板3上存在三個以上之觸控位置,亦可進行相同動作。對此,參照圖式加以說明。圖45係顯示第2動作例中設定於觸控面板內之有效區域之其他例之方塊圖。另,圖45中,例示觸控面板3上之3個觸控位置分開之情形。 Further, in the description of the second operation example up to now, although the touch surface is mainly illustrated The two touch positions on the board 3 are separated. However, as shown in FIG. 30, the touch panel system 1r can perform the same action even if there are more than three touch positions on the touch panel 3. This will be described with reference to the drawings. 45 is a block diagram showing another example of an effective area set in the touch panel in the second operation example. In addition, in FIG. 45, the case where the three touch positions on the touch panel 3 are separated is exemplified.
如圖45所示,即使觸控面板3上存在3個觸控位置,區域設定部8亦可設定對應各觸控位置之有效區域A1~A3(參照圖42)。此時,驅動線驅動電路5只要分別選擇性驅動通過有效區域A1之驅動線35r1、通過有效區域A2之驅動線35r2、及通過有效區域A3之驅動線35r3即可。又,此時之觸控面板控制器4只要選擇性處理通過有效區域A1之感應線33r1、通過有效區域A2之感應線33r2、及通過有效區域A3之感應線33r3之各訊號即可。另,驅動線35r1~35r3及感應線33r1~33r3於圖中係以粗實線表示。 As shown in FIG. 45, even if there are three touch positions on the touch panel 3, the area setting unit 8 can set the effective areas A1 to A3 corresponding to the respective touch positions (see FIG. 42). At this time, the drive line drive circuit 5 may selectively drive the drive line 35r1 passing through the effective area A1, the drive line 35r2 passing through the effective area A2, and the drive line 35r3 passing through the effective area A3. Moreover, the touch panel controller 4 at this time may selectively process each of the signals passing through the sensing line 33r1 of the effective area A1, the sensing line 33r2 passing through the effective area A2, and the sensing line 33r3 passing through the effective area A3. Further, the drive lines 35r1 to 35r3 and the sense lines 33r1 to 33r3 are indicated by thick solid lines in the drawing.
如此,即使觸控面板3上之觸控位置數量發生變動,區域設定部8亦可配合設定之有效區域之變動,僅變動應驅動之驅動線、或應處理訊號之感應線。因此,如圖30所示之觸控面板系統1r係即使對在觸控面板3上存在3個以上之觸控位置之多點觸控中,亦可與具有2個觸控位置之情形(參照圖38~圖44)同樣對應。 In this manner, even if the number of touch positions on the touch panel 3 fluctuates, the area setting unit 8 can change only the driving line to be driven or the sensing line to be processed by the fluctuation of the set effective area. Therefore, the touch panel system 1r shown in FIG. 30 can be used in a multi-touch with more than three touch positions on the touch panel 3, and can have two touch positions (refer to Figures 38 to 44) correspond to each other.
然而,截至目前之第2動作例之說明中,雖然針對觸控面板3上觸控位置分開之情形加以例示,但亦可為觸控面板3上觸控位置接近之情形。該情形中,關於圖30所示之 觸控面板系統1r之動作例係參照圖式加以說明。圖46係顯示第2動作例中設定於觸控面板內之有效區域之其他例之方塊圖。另,圖46中,例示觸控面板3上有2個觸控位置接近之情形。 However, in the description of the second operation example, the case where the touch positions on the touch panel 3 are separated is exemplified, but the touch position on the touch panel 3 may be close. In this case, regarding FIG. 30 The operation example of the touch panel system 1r will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 46 is a block diagram showing another example of the effective area set in the touch panel in the second operation example. In addition, in FIG. 46, the case where the two touch positions on the touch panel 3 are close to each other is illustrated.
如圖46所示,觸控面板3上觸控位置接近之情形,區域設定部8可設定一部分區域重複之有效區域A1、A2。此時,驅動線驅動電路5係分別選擇性驅動僅通過有效區域A1之驅動線35r11、僅通過有效區域A2之驅動線35r22、及通過有效區域A1、A2兩者之驅動線35r12。又,此時觸控面板控制器4係選擇性處理僅通過有效區域A1之感應線35r11、僅通過有效區域A2之感應線33r22、及通過有效區域A1、A2兩者之感應線33r12之各訊號。另,驅動線35r11、35r22、35r12、及感應線33r11、33r22、33r12於圖中係以粗實線表示。 As shown in FIG. 46, when the touch position on the touch panel 3 is close, the area setting unit 8 can set the effective areas A1 and A2 in which a part of the area is repeated. At this time, the drive line drive circuit 5 selectively drives the drive line 35r11 passing only the effective area A1, the drive line 35r22 passing only the effective area A2, and the drive line 35r12 passing through both of the effective areas A1 and A2. Moreover, at this time, the touch panel controller 4 selectively processes the signals of only the sensing line 35r11 passing through the effective area A1, the sensing line 33r22 passing only the effective area A2, and the sensing line 33r12 passing through the effective areas A1 and A2. . Further, the drive lines 35r11, 35r22, 35r12, and the sense lines 33r11, 33r22, 33r12 are indicated by thick solid lines in the drawing.
該情形中,利用驅動線驅動電路5對驅動線35之驅動方法之具體例係參照圖式加以說明。圖47係顯示第2動作例中驅動線驅動電路之驅動線之具體驅動方法之其他例之圖。另,圖47係假設設定有如圖46所示之有效區域A1、A2之情形。 In this case, a specific example of a method of driving the drive line 35 by the drive line drive circuit 5 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 47 is a view showing another example of a specific driving method of the driving line of the driving line driving circuit in the second operation example. In addition, Fig. 47 assumes that the effective areas A1, A2 as shown in Fig. 46 are set.
如圖47所示,驅動線驅動電路5分別對僅通過有效區域A1之驅動線35r11、僅通過有效區域A2之驅動線35r22、及通過有效區域A1、A2之兩者之驅動線35r12施加上述固有驅動訊號(參照圖32)。再者,驅動線驅動電路5係使未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之各驅動線接地等,且抑制該等 驅動線之訊號位準隨時間產生變化。 As shown in FIG. 47, the drive line drive circuit 5 applies the above-described inherent to the drive line 35r11 passing only the effective area A1, the drive line 35r22 passing only the effective area A2, and the drive line 35r12 passing through both of the effective areas A1 and A2. Drive signal (refer to Figure 32). Further, the drive line drive circuit 5 grounds the drive lines that have not passed through any of the effective areas A1 and A2, and suppresses the same. The signal level of the drive line changes over time.
又,對該情形中,關於放大部71之具體動作例,參照圖式加以說明。圖48係顯示第2動作例中放大部具體動作之其他例之方塊圖。另,如圖48所示之放大部71與圖40所示之放大部71相同。又,圖48係假設設定有如圖46所示之有效區域A1、A2之情形。 In this case, a specific operation example of the amplifying unit 71 will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 48 is a block diagram showing another example of the specific operation of the amplifying unit in the second operation example. Further, the amplifying portion 71 shown in Fig. 48 is the same as the amplifying portion 71 shown in Fig. 40. Further, Fig. 48 assumes that the effective areas A1, A2 as shown in Fig. 46 are set.
如圖48所示,供給僅通過有效區域A1之感應線33r11、僅通過有效區域A2之感應線33r22、及通過有效區域A1、A2兩者之感應線33r12之各訊號之開閉開關712成導通狀態。藉此,僅通過有效區域A1之感應線33r11、僅通過有效區域A2之感應線33r22、及通過有效區域A1、A2兩者之感應線33r12之各訊號經放大器711放大,並從放大部71輸出。另一方面,供給未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之感應線之訊號之開閉開關712成非導通狀態。藉此,未通過有效區域A之感應線之訊號未被放大器711放大,且未從放大部71輸出。 As shown in FIG. 48, the opening and closing switch 712 that supplies only the sensing line 33r11 of the effective area A1, the sensing line 33r22 of only the effective area A2, and the sensing line 33r12 of both the effective areas A1 and A2 is turned on. . Thereby, only the sensing line 33r11 of the effective area A1, the sensing line 33r22 passing only the effective area A2, and the respective signals of the sensing line 33r12 passing through the effective areas A1 and A2 are amplified by the amplifier 711 and output from the amplifying part 71. . On the other hand, the opening and closing switch 712 that supplies a signal that does not pass through the sensing line of any of the effective areas A1, A2 is in a non-conduction state. Thereby, the signal of the sensing line that has not passed through the effective area A is not amplified by the amplifier 711, and is not output from the amplifying portion 71.
又,關於該情形中之訊號取得部72之具體動作例,參照圖式加以說明。圖49係顯示第2動作例中選擇取得部之具體動作之其他例之方塊圖。另,圖49所示之訊號取得部72與圖41所示之訊號取得部72相同。此外,圖49係假設設定有圖46所示之有效區域A1、A2之情形。 Further, a specific operation example of the signal acquisition unit 72 in this case will be described with reference to the drawings. Fig. 49 is a block diagram showing another example of the specific operation of the selection acquisition unit in the second operation example. The signal acquisition unit 72 shown in FIG. 49 is the same as the signal acquisition unit 72 shown in FIG. In addition, FIG. 49 assumes that the effective areas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 46 are set.
如圖49所示,分支開關721可與僅通過有效區域A1之感應線33r11、僅通過有效區域A2之感應線33r22、及通過有效區域A1、A2兩者之感應線33r12之各者所對應之端子連 接。藉此,由放大部71放大後之僅通過有效區域A1之感應線33r11之訊號、僅通過有效區域A2之感應線33r22之訊號、及通過有效區域A1、A2兩者之感應線33r12之訊號分別輸出至後段。另一方面,分支開關721不與未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之感應線所對應之端子連接。藉此,未通過有效區域A1、A2任一者之感應線之訊號未輸出至後段。 As shown in FIG. 49, the branch switch 721 can correspond to each of the sensing line 33r11 passing only the effective area A1, the sensing line 33r22 passing only the effective area A2, and the sensing line 33r12 passing through both the effective areas A1 and A2. Terminal connection Pick up. Thereby, the signal amplified by the amplifying portion 71 only through the sensing line 33r11 of the effective area A1, the signal passing only the sensing line 33r22 of the effective area A2, and the signal of the sensing line 33r12 passing through the effective areas A1 and A2, respectively Output to the back section. On the other hand, the branch switch 721 is not connected to a terminal corresponding to the sensing line that does not pass through any of the effective areas A1, A2. Thereby, the signal of the sensing line that has not passed through any of the effective areas A1, A2 is not output to the latter stage.
如此,即使觸控面板3上檢測之觸控位置接近,區域設定部8亦配合設定之有效區域之變動,僅變動應驅動之驅動線、或應處理訊號之感應線。因此,如圖30所示之觸控面板系統1r即使處於在觸控面板3上複數個觸控位置接近之情形下之多點觸控,亦可與觸控位置分開之情形(參照圖38~圖44)同樣對應。 In this manner, even if the touch position detected on the touch panel 3 is close, the area setting unit 8 changes only the drive line to be driven or the sense line to be processed by the change in the set effective area. Therefore, the touch panel system 1r shown in FIG. 30 can be separated from the touch position even if the multi-touch in the case where the plurality of touch positions on the touch panel 3 are close to each other (refer to FIG. 38~) Figure 44) also corresponds.
如上所述,觸控面板3上複數個觸控位置接近之狀況下,實質上,區域設定部8成為設定包含各觸控位置之有效區域。又,區域設定部8在觸控面板3上複數個觸控位置接近之情形中,亦可以設定包含各觸控位置之包括性有效區域之方式,進行有效區域資訊之算出等。 As described above, in a state where a plurality of touch positions on the touch panel 3 are close to each other, the area setting unit 8 substantially sets an effective area including each touch position. Further, in a case where the plurality of touch positions on the touch panel 3 are close to each other, the area setting unit 8 may set the effective area including the touch positions, calculate the effective area information, and the like.
又,無論觸控面板3上複數個觸控位置是否接近,區域設定部8均可基於觸控面板控制器4所檢測之複數個觸控位置,來設定有效區域。具體例如,區域設定部8亦可設定包含觸控面板控制器4所檢測之各觸控位置之包括性有效區域。 Moreover, regardless of whether the plurality of touch positions on the touch panel 3 are close, the area setting unit 8 can set the effective area based on the plurality of touch positions detected by the touch panel controller 4. Specifically, for example, the area setting unit 8 may also set an inclusive effective area including each touch position detected by the touch panel controller 4.
(4)其他 (4) Others
[1]雖然例示放大部71及訊號取得部72兩者基於有效區域資訊,選擇性處理感應線33之訊號之構成,但亦可以任一者進行選擇性處理之構成。進行該等處理之任一者時,亦可降低電力消耗。 [1] Although both the amplifying unit 71 and the signal obtaining unit 72 are configured to selectively process the signal of the sensing line 33 based on the effective area information, any one of them may be selectively processed. When any of these processes is performed, power consumption can also be reduced.
[2]雖然例示驅動線驅動電路5選擇性驅動驅動線35之動作(第1動作)、及觸控面板控制器4選擇性處理感應線33之訊號之動作(第2動作)同時進行之情形,但亦可進行任一動作。於進行該等動作之任一者時,亦可謀求降低電力消耗或提升觸控操作之檢測感度。 [2] The operation of the drive line drive circuit 5 to selectively drive the drive line 35 (the first operation) and the operation of the touch panel controller 4 to selectively process the signal of the induction line 33 (the second operation) are simultaneously performed. But you can do any action. When performing any of these operations, it is also possible to reduce power consumption or improve the detection sensitivity of the touch operation.
[3]雖然作為本發明之一個實施形態,例示有投影型靜電電容方式之觸控面板系統,但本發明只要係其他投影型之靜電電容方式、或表面型之靜電電容方式、光學式等之可選擇性驅動或選擇性處理之觸控面板系統,任何方式之觸控面板系統均可應用。 [3] Although a projection type capacitive touch panel system is exemplified as an embodiment of the present invention, the present invention is only required to be of another projection type electrostatic capacitance method, a surface type electrostatic capacitance method, or an optical type. A touch panel system that can be selectively driven or selectively processed, and any type of touch panel system can be applied.
本發明係不限定於上述第1特徵及第2特徵中各者之實施形態,且可在申請專利範圍所示之範圍中進行各種變更,將第1特徵中實施形態1~17及第2特徵所揭示之技術性方法適當組合而取得之實施形態亦包含於本發明之技術範圍中。即,本次揭示之第1特徵之實施形態1~17及第2特徵之所有點均應認為僅作為例示,而並非意欲限制者。本發明之範圍並非如第1特徵之實施形態1~17及第2特徵所說明,而係由專利申請範圍而表示,與專利申請範圍意義均等及範圍內之所有變更均欲涵蓋於本發明之範圍內。 The present invention is not limited to the embodiments of the first and second features described above, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the claims, and the first and third features of the first feature are described. Embodiments obtained by appropriately combining the disclosed technical methods are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. That is, all of the points 1 to 17 and the second feature of the first feature disclosed in the present invention are considered to be illustrative only and not intended to be limiting. The scope of the present invention is not intended to be limited to the scope of the present invention, and is intended to be included in the scope of the present invention. Within the scope.
本發明可應用於電視、個人電腦、行動電話、數位相機、攜帶式遊戲機、電子相框、攜帶式資訊終端、電子書、家電製品、售票機、ATM、及車用導航裝置等觸控式之各種電子機器。此外,亦可應用於大型顯示裝置之顯示面或電子式之白板等之大型電子機器。 The invention can be applied to touch type such as television, personal computer, mobile phone, digital camera, portable game machine, electronic photo frame, portable information terminal, electronic book, home appliance product, ticket vending machine, ATM, and car navigation device. Various electronic machines. In addition, it can also be applied to large electronic devices such as a display surface of a large display device or an electronic whiteboard.
1‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1‧‧‧Touch panel system
1a‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1a‧‧‧Touch panel system
1b‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1b‧‧‧Touch panel system
1c‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1c‧‧‧Touch panel system
1d‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1d‧‧‧Touch panel system
1e‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1e‧‧‧Touch Panel System
1f‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1f‧‧‧Touch Panel System
1g‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1g‧‧‧ touch panel system
1h‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1h‧‧‧ touch panel system
1i‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1i‧‧‧Touch Panel System
1j‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1j‧‧‧Touch Panel System
1k‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1k‧‧‧ touch panel system
1m‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1m‧‧‧ touch panel system
1n‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1n‧‧‧Touch Panel System
1o‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1o‧‧‧Touch Panel System
1r‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1r‧‧‧Touch Panel System
2‧‧‧顯示裝置 2‧‧‧Display device
3‧‧‧觸控面板 3‧‧‧Touch panel
3a‧‧‧觸控面板 3a‧‧‧Touch panel
3b‧‧‧觸控面板 3b‧‧‧ touch panel
3c‧‧‧觸控面板 3c‧‧‧ touch panel
4‧‧‧觸控面板控制器 4‧‧‧Touch Panel Controller
5‧‧‧驅動線驅動電路 5‧‧‧Drive line driver circuit
8‧‧‧區域設定部 8‧‧‧Regional setting department
10‧‧‧行動電話 10‧‧‧Mobile Phone
31‧‧‧主感應器(主感應部) 31‧‧‧Main sensor (main sensor)
31a‧‧‧主感應器群(主感應部) 31a‧‧‧Main sensor group (main sensor)
31b‧‧‧主感應器群(主感應部) 31b‧‧‧Main sensor group (main sensor)
32‧‧‧副感應器(副感應部) 32‧‧‧Sub-sensor (sub-sensing unit)
32a‧‧‧副感應器群(副感應部) 32a‧‧‧Sub-sensor group (sub-sensing unit)
33‧‧‧感應線 33‧‧‧Induction line
33r‧‧‧感應線 33r‧‧‧Induction line
33r1‧‧‧感應線 33r1‧‧‧Induction line
33r2‧‧‧感應線 33r2‧‧‧Induction line
33r3‧‧‧感應線 33r3‧‧‧Induction line
33r11‧‧‧感應線 33r11‧‧‧Induction line
33r12‧‧‧感應線 33r12‧‧‧Induction line
33r22‧‧‧感應線 33r22‧‧‧Induction line
34‧‧‧副感應線 34‧‧‧Subsense line
35‧‧‧驅動線 35‧‧‧ drive line
35r‧‧‧驅動線 35r‧‧‧ drive line
35r1‧‧‧驅動線 35r1‧‧‧ drive line
35r2‧‧‧驅動線 35r2‧‧‧ drive line
35r3‧‧‧驅動線 35r3‧‧‧ drive line
35r11‧‧‧驅動線 35r11‧‧‧ drive line
35r12‧‧‧驅動線 35r12‧‧‧ drive line
35r22‧‧‧驅動線 35r22‧‧‧ drive line
41‧‧‧減算部 41‧‧‧Decrease Department
41a‧‧‧減算部 41a‧‧‧Decrease Department
42‧‧‧座標檢測部(觸控檢測部) 42‧‧‧Coordinate detection unit (touch detection unit)
43‧‧‧CPU 43‧‧‧CPU
45a‧‧‧儲存部 45a‧‧‧Storage Department
45b‧‧‧儲存部 45b‧‧‧Storage Department
45c‧‧‧儲存部 45c‧‧‧Storage Department
45d‧‧‧儲存部 45d‧‧‧Storage Department
46‧‧‧加算部 46‧‧‧Additional Department
47‧‧‧電荷積分器(解碼部) 47‧‧‧Charge integrator (decoding unit)
48‧‧‧AD轉換部(第3 AD轉換部、第4 AD轉換部) 48‧‧‧AD conversion unit (3rd AD conversion unit, 4th AD conversion unit)
48a‧‧‧AD轉換部(第1 AD轉換部、第2 AD轉換部) 48a‧‧‧AD conversion unit (first AD conversion unit, second AD conversion unit)
49‧‧‧差動放大器 49‧‧‧Differential Amplifier
50‧‧‧全差動放大器 50‧‧‧ Fully Differential Amplifier
51‧‧‧CPU 51‧‧‧CPU
52‧‧‧ROM 52‧‧‧ROM
53‧‧‧RAM 53‧‧‧RAM
54‧‧‧照相機 54‧‧‧ camera
55‧‧‧麥克風 55‧‧‧Microphone
56‧‧‧揚聲器 56‧‧‧Speakers
57‧‧‧操作鍵 57‧‧‧ operation keys
58‧‧‧解碼部 58‧‧‧Decoding Department
59‧‧‧判定部(觸控檢測部) 59‧‧‧Decision Department (Touch Detection Department)
61‧‧‧非觸控操作時資訊記憶部 61‧‧‧Information memory department for non-touch operation
62‧‧‧校正部 62‧‧‧Correction Department
71‧‧‧放大部 71‧‧‧Amplification
72‧‧‧訊號取得部 72‧‧‧Signal Acquisition Department
73‧‧‧AD轉換部 73‧‧‧AD conversion department
81‧‧‧有效區域算出部 81‧‧‧Effective Area Calculation Department
82‧‧‧儲存部 82‧‧‧ Storage Department
100‧‧‧雜訊處理部 100‧‧‧Communication Processing Department
101‧‧‧過濾部 101‧‧‧Filter Department
102‧‧‧邏輯反轉部 102‧‧‧Logic Reversal Department
103‧‧‧加算部 103‧‧‧Additional Department
711‧‧‧放大器 711‧‧Amplifier
712‧‧‧開閉開關 712‧‧‧Open and close switch
721‧‧‧分支開關 721‧‧‧ branch switch
821‧‧‧暫存器 821‧‧‧ register
A‧‧‧有效區域 A‧‧‧effective area
A1‧‧‧有效區域 A1‧‧‧ effective area
A2‧‧‧有效區域 A2‧‧‧effective area
A3‧‧‧有效區域 A3‧‧‧effective area
SW‧‧‧開閉開關 SW‧‧‧Opening switch
圖1係顯示本發明之觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 1 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of a touch panel system of the present invention.
圖2係顯示圖1之觸控面板系統之基本處理之流程圖。 2 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system of FIG. 1.
圖3(a)~(c)係顯示圖1之觸控面板系統中由減算部所處理之訊號之波形之圖。 3(a) to (c) are diagrams showing waveforms of signals processed by the subtraction unit in the touch panel system of Fig. 1.
圖4係顯示本發明之其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 4 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖5係顯示圖4之觸控面板系統中,未包含副感應器群之觸控面板之概略圖 5 is a schematic diagram showing a touch panel that does not include a sub-sensor group in the touch panel system of FIG.
圖6係顯示圖4之觸控面板系統之基本處理之流程圖。 6 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system of FIG. 4.
圖7係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 7 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖8係顯示圖7之觸控面板系統之基本處理之流程圖。 FIG. 8 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system of FIG. 7.
圖9係顯示先前觸控面板系統中觸控面板之驅動方式之圖。 FIG. 9 is a view showing a driving manner of a touch panel in a previous touch panel system.
圖10係顯示本發明之觸控面板系統中觸控面板之驅動方式(正交序列驅動方式)之圖。 FIG. 10 is a view showing a driving method (orthogonal sequence driving method) of a touch panel in the touch panel system of the present invention.
圖11係顯示利用圖9之驅動方式之觸控面板,為取得與圖10之驅動方式之觸控面板同等感度所必須之處理之圖。 FIG. 11 is a view showing a process necessary for obtaining the same sensitivity as the touch panel of the driving method of FIG. 10 by using the touch panel of the driving method of FIG. 9.
圖12係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統,且包含正交序列驅動方式之觸控面板之觸控面板系統之概略圖。 12 is a schematic diagram showing a touch panel system of a touch panel including an orthogonal sequence driving method according to another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖13係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 13 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖14係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 14 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖15係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 15 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖16係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 16 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖17係顯示圖16之觸控面板系統中全差動放大器之一例之電路圖。 17 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a fully differential amplifier in the touch panel system of FIG. 16.
圖18係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 18 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖19係顯示設置於專利文獻1之觸控面板系統之雜訊處理部之方塊圖。 FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a noise processing unit provided in the touch panel system of Patent Document 1.
圖20係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 20 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖21係顯示圖20之觸控面板系統之基本處理之流程圖。 21 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the touch panel system of FIG.
圖22係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 22 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖23係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成 之概略圖。 23 is a diagram showing the basic composition of the other touch panel system of the present invention. Schematic diagram.
圖24係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 24 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖25係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 25 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖26係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 26 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖27係顯示圖22之觸控面板系統中判定部之基本處理之流程圖。 Fig. 27 is a flow chart showing the basic processing of the determination unit in the touch panel system of Fig. 22.
圖28(a)~(c)係顯示圖27之流程圖中觸控資訊辨識方法之模式圖。 28(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the touch information identification method in the flowchart of Fig. 27.
圖29係顯示搭載上述觸控面板系統之行動電話之構成之功能方塊圖。 Fig. 29 is a functional block diagram showing the configuration of a mobile phone equipped with the above touch panel system.
圖30係顯示本發明之進而其他觸控面板系統之基本構成之概略圖。 Fig. 30 is a schematic view showing the basic configuration of still another touch panel system of the present invention.
圖31係顯示有效區域之一例之方塊圖。 Figure 31 is a block diagram showing an example of an effective area.
圖32(a)、(b)係顯示第1動作例中驅動線驅動電路之驅動線之具體驅動方法之一例之圖。 32(a) and (b) are views showing an example of a specific driving method of the driving line of the driving line driving circuit in the first operation example.
圖33係顯示第1動作例中放大部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 Fig. 33 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the amplifying unit in the first operation example.
圖34係顯示第1動作例中選擇取得部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 Fig. 34 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the selection acquisition unit in the first operation example.
圖35係顯示第1動作例中區域設定部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 Fig. 35 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the area setting unit in the first operation example.
圖36係顯示第1動作例中有效區域之設定方法之一例之圖。 Fig. 36 is a view showing an example of a method of setting an effective area in the first operation example.
圖37係顯示第1動作例中有效區域之設定方法之其他例之圖。 Fig. 37 is a view showing another example of the method of setting the effective area in the first operation example.
圖38係顯示第2動作例中設定於觸控面板內之有效區域之一例之方塊圖。 38 is a block diagram showing an example of an effective area set in the touch panel in the second operation example.
圖39係顯示第2動作例中驅動線驅動電路之驅動線之具體驅動方法之一例之圖。 Fig. 39 is a view showing an example of a specific driving method of the driving line of the driving line driving circuit in the second operation example.
圖40係顯示第2動作例中放大部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 Fig. 40 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the amplifying unit in the second operation example.
圖41係顯示第2動作例中選擇取得部之具體動作之一例之方塊圖。 41 is a block diagram showing an example of a specific operation of the selection acquisition unit in the second operation example.
圖42係顯示第2動作例中區域設定部之具體動作之一例之流程圖。 Fig. 42 is a flow chart showing an example of a specific operation of the area setting unit in the second operation example.
圖43係顯示第2動作例中有效區域之設定方法之一例之圖。 Fig. 43 is a view showing an example of a method of setting an effective area in the second operation example.
圖44係顯示第2動作例中有效區域之設定方法之其他例之圖。 Fig. 44 is a view showing another example of the method of setting the effective area in the second operation example.
圖45係顯示第2動作例中設定於觸控面板3內之有效區域之其他例之方塊圖。 45 is a block diagram showing another example of the effective area set in the touch panel 3 in the second operation example.
圖46係顯示第2動作例中設定於觸控面板3內之有效區域之其他例之方塊圖。 Fig. 46 is a block diagram showing another example of the effective area set in the touch panel 3 in the second operation example.
圖47係顯示第2動作例中驅動線驅動電路之驅動線具體之驅動方法之其他例之圖。 Fig. 47 is a view showing another example of a method of driving the drive line of the drive line drive circuit in the second operation example.
圖48係顯示第2動作例中放大部具體動作之其他例之方塊圖。 Fig. 48 is a block diagram showing another example of the specific operation of the amplifying unit in the second operation example.
圖49係顯示第2動作例中選擇取得部之具體動作之其他例之方塊圖。 Fig. 49 is a block diagram showing another example of the specific operation of the selection acquisition unit in the second operation example.
1‧‧‧觸控面板系統 1‧‧‧Touch panel system
2‧‧‧顯示裝置 2‧‧‧Display device
3‧‧‧觸控面板 3‧‧‧Touch panel
4‧‧‧觸控面板控制器 4‧‧‧Touch Panel Controller
5‧‧‧驅動線驅動電路 5‧‧‧Drive line driver circuit
31‧‧‧主感應器 31‧‧‧Main sensor
32‧‧‧副感應器 32‧‧‧Sub sensor
33‧‧‧感應線 33‧‧‧Induction line
34‧‧‧副感應線 34‧‧‧Subsense line
35‧‧‧驅動線 35‧‧‧ drive line
41‧‧‧減算部 41‧‧‧Decrease Department
42‧‧‧座標檢測部(觸控檢測部) 42‧‧‧Coordinate detection unit (touch detection unit)
43‧‧‧CPU 43‧‧‧CPU
Claims (24)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
TW101119848A TWI552059B (en) | 2012-06-01 | 2012-06-01 | Touch panel system and electronic device |
Applications Claiming Priority (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
TW101119848A TWI552059B (en) | 2012-06-01 | 2012-06-01 | Touch panel system and electronic device |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
TW201351244A TW201351244A (en) | 2013-12-16 |
TWI552059B true TWI552059B (en) | 2016-10-01 |
Family
ID=50158043
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
TW101119848A TWI552059B (en) | 2012-06-01 | 2012-06-01 | Touch panel system and electronic device |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
TW (1) | TWI552059B (en) |
Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100002016A1 (en) * | 2006-07-13 | 2010-01-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method of controlling touch panel display device and touch panel display device using the same |
TW201113791A (en) * | 2009-10-12 | 2011-04-16 | Novatek Microelectronics Corp | Touch detection method and touch detection device and touch display device |
TW201117180A (en) * | 2009-11-05 | 2011-05-16 | Innolux Display Corp | Touch panel and touch display device |
TW201118485A (en) * | 2009-11-19 | 2011-06-01 | Innolux Display Corp | Touch display device |
-
2012
- 2012-06-01 TW TW101119848A patent/TWI552059B/en not_active IP Right Cessation
Patent Citations (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20100002016A1 (en) * | 2006-07-13 | 2010-01-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | Method of controlling touch panel display device and touch panel display device using the same |
TW201113791A (en) * | 2009-10-12 | 2011-04-16 | Novatek Microelectronics Corp | Touch detection method and touch detection device and touch display device |
TW201117180A (en) * | 2009-11-05 | 2011-05-16 | Innolux Display Corp | Touch panel and touch display device |
TW201118485A (en) * | 2009-11-19 | 2011-06-01 | Innolux Display Corp | Touch display device |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
TW201351244A (en) | 2013-12-16 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP5389888B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP4955116B1 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
TWI518565B (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
TWI524224B (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
TWI502418B (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5281701B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
US8902200B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5872670B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
TWI552059B (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5663104B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5845344B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5620018B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5727051B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device | |
JP5620019B2 (en) | Touch panel system and electronic device |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
MM4A | Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees |